WCC III - WCC Control Systems

Transcription

WCC III - WCC Control Systems
WCC III
3. WCC3.EXE Screen
Descriptions
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 3: WCC3.EXE SCREEN
DESCRIPTIONS
How to Start or Run the WCC3.exe Program.......3-1
WCC III Main Menu Tool Bar ............................... 3-3
Logic Switch Summary Screen ........................ 3-76
Logic Switch Screen ...........................................................3-77
Binary Output Summary Screen....................... 3-81
WCC III Binary Output Board / V-Out Board ..... 3-83
Binary Output Screen .........................................................3-85
Special Purpose Keys ......................................... 3-8
Main Menu Screen ………………………………………3-10
Analog Input Summary Screen …………….………3-12
Alarm Summary Screen .................................... 3-87
Satellite Summary Screen ................................ 3-88
Rebuild Satellite Tables.................................... 3-90
Analog Input General Screen .............................................3-14
Analog Input Pulse Screen .................................................3-18
Override Screen ................................................ 3-91
Analog Input Thermistor Screen .........................................3-20
Analog Inputs......................................................................3-24
Holiday Schedule Screen ................................. 3-92
Analog Input Resistor Screen .............................................3-35
Analog Input Resistor+ Screen...........................................3-38
Analog Input RawCount Screen .........................................3-41
System Parameters Screen .............................. 3-94
Analog Input Thermistor+ Screen .......................................3-44
Operator Codes Screen......................................................3-98
Control Output Screens …….…………………….….3-51
On/Off and Units of Measure
Control Output Summary Screen .......................................3-52
EA Driver Screen ................................................................3-54
Dual Limit Screen ...............................................................3-56
Messages Screen.............................................. 3-99
Alarm Messages Screen ................................. 3-100
Time Clock Screen .............................................................3-59
Control Outputs ..................................................................3-61
Secure the System ......................................... 3-101
Analog Output Summary Screen ...................... 3-63
Energy Consumption Screen .......................... 3-102
Analog Output Screen ........................................................3-65
Custom Screens .............................................. 3-105
WCC III System Logging ................................... 3-68
SAT Trend Log Summary Screen .......................................3-69
Bitmap Screens .............................................. 3-109
SAT Change of State Trend Log Screen ............................3-70
SAT Run Time Trend Log Screen .......................................3-71
SAT Analog Trend Trend Log Screen .................................3-73
SAT Analog Peak Trend Log Screen ..................................3-75
Network Information Screen .......................... 3-112
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PID Programs .................................................. 3-113
Binary Global Summary Screen ..................... 3-160
Simple PID Programs Screen...........................................3-114
Binary Global Screen........................................................3-162
Modified PID Programs Screen ........................................3-116
Binary Global Combinatorial Mode Screen ......................3-163
Digital PID Programs Screen............................................3-117
Binary Global Compare Mode Screen ..............................3-165
PID Tuning Screen ...........................................................3-118
Binary Global External Mode Screen ...............................3-167
Binary Global Alarm Mode Screen ...................................3-169
Week Schedule Summary Screen .................. 3-120
Binary Global Alarm-By-Class Mode Screen ....................3-171
Week Schedule Screen ....................................................3-121
Binary Global One Shot Mode Screen .............................3-173
Binary Global Clock Mode Screen....................................3-175
Optimal Start Screen ...................................... 3-122
Binary Global Delay Mode Screen ...................................3-177
Binary Global PWM Mode Screen ....................................3-179
Analog Globals ................................................ 3-125
Binary Global Lead Lag Mode Screen..............................3-181
Analog Global Summary Screen ......................................3-126
Shed/Restore Screen ...................................... 3-184
Analog Global Screen.......................................................3-127
Analog Global Averaged List Screen ................................3-129
Analog Global Sorted List Screen ....................................3-130
Analog Global Integral Mode ............................................3-131
Analog Global Integral Mode Accumulation Mode............3-132
Analog Global Integral Mode Average Mode ....................3-134
Duty Cycle Screen .......................................... 3-186
Proportional Reset Screen ............................. 3-188
Proportional Reset Graph .................................................3-190
Analog Global Integral Mode Sliding Window Mode ........3-137
Analog Global Math Function Mode Screen .....................3-140
Tenant Override Utility List ............................ 3-191
Analog Global Look Up Table Mode .................................3-142
Analog Global External Mode Screen ..............................3-146
Useful Analog Actuator/Valve Control Information ............3-147
Analog Global Dual Valve Mode .......................................3-148
Analog Global Proportional Mode Screen ........................3-152
Analog Global Dual Ramp Mode Screen …………………3-154
Analog Global Multi-Proportion Mode Screen …………...3-156
Analog Global Pulse Start Mode Screen …………………3-158
General Message Screen................................ 3-193
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Running the WCC3 Program
SECTION 3:
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
____________________________________________________
How to Start or Run the WCC3.exe
Program (SS5021)
Using your mouse, left-click on the <Access Job
The Remote Access Dialog Window will appear.
Site>
button.
By selecting <OK>, the WCC3.exe program will now start to
connect to the selected WCC III – MCD via this selected IP address
connection. It should bring up the WCC III Set Password Dialog
screen within a new window. If the IP address connection fails to
connect to the WCC III – MCD, then another small dialog box
window will appear. This is the Cannot Communicate to Backtask
Dialog Box.
The WCC3.exe shortcut icon should have been
installed on your WCC III front end computer
desktop with the WCC III Installation Software
CD. The WCC III Installation Software CD is
WattMaster Controls Part # DM1WC011-01X.
To start the WCC3.exe program, double-click the left mouse button
on the Shortcut Icon located on the Windows desktop.
After a short period of time, dependent upon the CPU speed of your
Windows based computer and the speed of your IP connection to
the internet, the WCC III Type Connection Dialog Box will appear.
If you click <Yes>, you will exit the WCC3.exe program. You will
have to figure out why you cannot connect to the WCC III – MCD
via the IP address connection.
If you click <No>, you will not exit the WCC3.exe program,
but instead you will be connected to the WCC III Main Menu.
This connection to the WCC III Main Menu is not an actual IP
connection, but rather a “dummy” WCC III main menu screen
window with no values. This “dummy” WCC III main menu
screen window will allow you to view and see what the actual
WCC3.exe screens will look like – minus any data.
Server IP Address:
This is the static IP address of the WCC III – MCD. An IP Address
is like a phone number on the world wide web. The IP address for
the WCC III – MCD must be Static (does not change) as opposed
to Dynamic (constantly changing). This static IP address must be
provided by your internet service provider. (A static IP address
is the preferred IP connection method for the WCC III system to
function.) If you actually know the static IP address of the WCC
III – MCD that you wish to connect to, please enter it here in the
Server IP Address field, or better yet, continue to the Remote Access
Dialog Window by selecting the <Access Job Site> button.
You can use a Dynamic IP Address with the WCC III – MCD,
but you must then have what is called a static “Host Name”. This
static “Host name” must then be provided by your internet service
provider and is limited to 58 total characters.
Port Number:
The WCC3.exe program opens a two-way, secure communications
port that then allows for communication between the WCC III –
MCD and the WCC3.exe program that is running on the WCC
III Front end computer. This IP Address connection is done on a
higher address port number than normal (WCC III connection is
port number 39289) to help reduce the risk of computer hacking.
WCC III Technical Guide
In the Set Password Dialog Screen enter an “Operator:”
identification and a “Code:” or password equal to at least a pass
level 0 that has been previously set up on the WCCIII System
Parameter – Operator Code Screen. (See the Operator Code
Screen of the System Parameter Screen in Section 3 for information
on setting up Operator Codes) Click <Check Password>, if the
“Current Pass Level:” stays at 0 or higher (1, 2, or 3) then click
<OK>. By selecting <OK>, the WCC3.exe program will now start
to connect to the selected WCC III – MCD via this selected IP
address connection. It should bring up the WCC III Main Menu
within a new window. If the “Current Pass Level:” changes to
–1 then you do not have access to the WCCIII – MCD. If you
do not have access to the WCCIII – MCD and you click <OK>
then this connection to the WCC III Main Menu is not an actual IP
connection, but rather a “dummy” WCC III Main Menu window
with no values. This “dummy” WCC III Main Menu window will
allow you to view and see what the actual WCC3.exe screens will
look like – minus any data.
3-1
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Running the WCC3 Program
IP Address:
This is the static IP address where the WCC III – MCD is located.
An IP Address is like a phone number on the world wide web.
The IP address for the WCC III – MCD must be static (does not
change) as opposed to Dynamic (constantly changing). This static
IP Address must be provided by your internet service provider.
(A static IP address is the preferred IP connection method for the
WCC III system to function.)
Port Number:
The Remote Access Dialog Box will allow you to enter multiple
WCC III – MCD IP addresses based upon “Job Site” names. This
is done by typing in the name of the jobsite you wish to call your
system.
First you must select a “BLANK” line in the bottom box area
with your left mouse button. (This line will then be highlighted
in “Blue”.) You must then enter a Job Site name in the “Job Site”
field, along with the static IP address and Port number (39289) for
the WCC III – MCD that you wish to connect to with the WCC3.
exe program.
If you are using a static “Host Name” instead of a static IP address
please make sure that the Dynamic Address check box has been
selected, along with the static “Host Name” in the space provided.
As mentioned previously, you must get this static “Host Name”
from your internet service provider, and it is limited to 58 characters
total.
Please note that this “Job Site” name will also be the name of a
subdirectory that will automatically be created in the Local disk
C:\ProgramFiles\WCCIII\WCC3 subdirectory on the WCC III
Front end computer. The Remote Access Dialog Box also creates
a JobSite.dat data file in the C:\ProgramFiles\WCCIII\WCC3
subdirectory. This data file is not a viewable type of file. The
JobSite.dat file can be copied and then can be used on other WCC
III front end computers. This reused JobSite.dat will then recreate
the needed “Job Site” subdirectories on the other WCC III front
end computers upon the reselection of the Job Site IP address.
In an already filled out Remote Access Dialog Box, you can simply
select from the list of previously entered Job Sites that are displayed
in the bottom box field. Then left-click <OK>. This will take you
back to the Connection Dialog Box that was first displayed. This
Connection Dialog Box now should have the desired IP address in
the Server IP Address location field and the port number (39289)
in the Port Number location field for the WCC III – MCD that you
wish to connect to with the WCC3.exe program.
3-2
The WCC3.exe program opens a two-way, secure communications
port that then allows for communication between the WCC III –
MCD and the WCC3.exe program that is running on the WCC
III front end computer. This IP Address connection is done on a
higher address port number than normal (WCC III connection is
port number 39289) to help reduce the risk of computer hacking.
Job Site:
This is the name of the jobsite you wish to call your system. Please
note that this name will also be the name of a subdirectory that
will automatically be created in the Local disk C:\ProgramFiles\
WCCIII\WCC3 subdirectory.
Host Name:
You can use a Dynamic IP Address with the WCC III – MCD,
but you must then have what is called a static “Host Name”. This
static “Host name” must then be provided by your internet service
provider and is limited to 58 total characters.
When you have filled out all necessary fields, left-click <OK>.
This will take you back to the Connection Dialog Box that was
first displayed. This Connection Dialog Box now should have the
desired IP address in the Server IP Address location field and the
port number (39289) in the Port Number location field for the
WCC III – MCD that you wish to connect to with the WCC3.exe
program.
Left-click <Cancel> to return to the Connection Dialog Box that
was first displayed. The Connection Dialog Box will have the
same IP address as listed originally before in the Server IP Address
location field and the port number (39289) in the Port Number
location field.
Left-click <Print> to send all of this data in this Remote Access
Dialog Box to your Windows system default printer on the WCC
III front end computer. This print function is provided to give you
a hard paper backup copy of these IP address for the various WCC
III – MCD that you may have. This print function also creates a
Printscreen.dat data file in the C:\ProgramFiles\WCCIII\WCC3
subdirectory. This data file is not a viewable type of file.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
WCC III Main Menu Tool Bar
WCC III Main Menu Tool Bar
When you open the WCC III program and each of its available
screens, you will notice that the name of the screen will appear in
brackets at the top of the window, for example WCC III - [Main
Menu Screen]. Under that is what is referred to as the Top Menu
Bar. In the Top Menu Bar are the menus <File>, <Edit>, <View>,
<Window>, <Action>, <PassLevel>, and <Help>.
File Menu
View Menu
The <View> menu gives you the option to show or hide the Toolbar
and Status Bar. A checkmark indicates Show. No checkmark
indicates Hide. You can also view the Satellite Map. If you choose
this option, the Satellite Map will appear on the screen. Press
<Esc> to return to the WCC III Main Menu.
Window Menu
The <File> menu contains the functions <Print>, <Print Preview>
- preview your print job before printing, <Print Setup> - setup
your printer and printing options, <Print To File> - print to a file in
order to print the file at a later date, <Upload Slide Screen Files>
- saves all information for the Custom Screens and Bitmap Screens
on this WCCIII front end to the WCCIII – MCD, <Download
Slide Screen Files> - downloads all information for the Custom
Screens and Bitmap Screens to this WCCIII front end from the
WCCIII – MCD.
Edit Menu
The <Window> menu allows you to open more than one screen at
a time. Each screen is contained in its own window.
<Cascade>
will arrange all windows into a stack, with each
window offset slightly. <Tile> will display all windows equally
without overlapping.
<Arrange Icons> - This function is not available at this time.
<Open> - This function is not available at this time.
To activate a window, click the window title bar or choose the
name of the window in the <Window> menu. Multiple windows
are numbered in the order they were opened.
The <Edit> menu contains four functions; however, only <Copy>
and <Paste> are available for use. These functions work the same
as <Set Current Screen for Copying> and <Copy Screen From
Previous Screen> located in the <Action> menu.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-3
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
WCC III Main Menu Tool Bar
Action Menu
To set up the printing schedule for each screen, you must then
select <Action>, <Edit Print Screen Schedule>. The Edit Print
Screen Program Window will pop-up.
You can select the printing schedule by time, interval, or global
binary.
If you select <At Time>, the At Hour: and Minute: fields will
appear. Enter the time of day with a two-digit hour value (military
time) and a two-digit minute value. The hour value should be less
than 24, and the minute value should be less than 60.
If you select <With Interval>, the Interval: field will appear. Enter
the interval and select minutes, hours, or days from the drop down
menu. The interval should be less than 256 and greater than 0.
If you select <Global Binary>, the Global Binary Number: field
will appear. Enter a global binary number. If you wish to temporarily
remove the screen from the print schedule, select <None> from the
drop down menu. The global binary value should be less than or
equal to 512 and greater than 0.
The <Action> menu has many functions. These functions’
availability are tied to individual screens. Available menu items
will be bolded.
Edit Print Screen Schedule/ Add Current
Screen
<Edit Print Screen Schedule> and
<Add Current Screen for Print Screen Schedule> are used to
The first two menu items
automatically generate screen prints based on the schedule you set
up for each screen.
While in a screen, if you select <Action>, <Add Current Screen
to Print Screen Schedule>, the screen will be immediately added
to the Print Screen Schedule Program.
You must click <Change> to have the system accept the assigned
schedule. If you wish to remove a screen from the schedule,
highlight the screen name and then click <Delete>. To print a
screen immediately, highlight the screen name and then click
<Print>. Click <Exit> to exit the program.
Set Current Screen for Copying
To copy a set of data points from one satellite to the next, while
at the point you wish to copy from the current screen or within
the same satellite, select <Action>,<Set Current Screen for
Copying>.
A message similar to the following will appear at the bottom of
the screen:
Point __ of Satellite __ was tagged for copy!
3-4
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
WCC III Main Menu Tool Bar
Copy Screen From Previous Screen
While at the Home position at the screen you wish to copy the data
to, select <Action>,<Copy Screen From Previous Screen>. The
data point will be copied from the previous screen to the current
screen.
Clear Structure
While at the Home position on the screen, select <Action>, <Clear
Structure> to clear/remove the data from the screen. This works
the same as pressing <Ctrl><Home>.
Acknowledge Alarm/Acknowledge All Alarms
Select <Action>,<Acknowledge Alarm> to acknowledge a
single alarm. Select <Action>,<Acknowledge All Alarms> to
acknowledge all alarms on the Alarm Summary Screen.
NOTE:
Acknowledge All Alarms only works with the Alarm
Summary Screen.
Clear Error/Clear All Errors
While at the Satellite Summary Screen, select <Action>,<Clear
Error> to clear an error located in the ERR column. You must
have the desired row highlighted in order to do this. Select
<Action>,<Clear All Errors> to clear all errors.
To rebuild all tables, type a zero in the Satellite Number field
and select <Rebuild All Tables>. To rebuild one table, enter the
satellite number and then select <Rebuild One Table>.
Set Simulate Satellite/Clear Simulate Satellite
While at the Satellite Summary Screen, highlight an empty satellite
entry and then select <Action>,<Set Simulate Satellite> to
create a simulated satellite. Select <Action>,<Clear Simulate
Satellite> to reverse this process.
Clear the TOS/Clear all TOS
TOS stands for TUC off the system which means the satellite is no
longer communicating with the Wcc3 system. To clear the alarm
once communications are reestablished, do the following: While at
the Satellite Summary Screen, select <Action>,<Clear the TOS>
or <Clear all TOS> to clear one or more TUCs that are off the
system.
Looking Back in Time
You have the ability to view information for any month, day, and
year and time of day. The data is saved in the BACKTASK folder
on the hard drive. Select <Action>, <Looking Back in Time>.
The Back to Time Dialog Window will pop-up.
Delete Satellite
While at the Satellite Summary Screen, you can delete a satellite by
placing the cursor on the satellite you wish to delete and selecting
<Action>,<Delete Satellite>.
Force Search Satellite
While at the Satellite Summary Screen, you can search for a satellite
by placing the cursor at a satellite number you know to exist but is
lacking data, by selecting <Action>,<Force Search Satellite>.
Rebuild Satellite Unit/Pattern Table
While at the Satellite Summary Screen, you can rebuild satellite
tables by selecting <Action>, <Rebuild Satellite Unit/Pattern
Table>. The following window will appear:
Use the arrow buttons at the top to move through months and years.
Select the day of the month by clicking on it. Type in the hour of
the day in two-digit military format. Then select <OK>.
The WCC III system will retrieve the data from the entered date
and time. To return to the current date and time, simply select
<Action>,<Looking Back in Time> again.
Save As Current
Once you retrieve data from the hard disk, you can save the data
to the satellite. This may be necessary if someone entered the
wrong data for a satellite, for example. To save the retrieved data
to the satellite as the current data, select <Action>, <Save As
Current>.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-5
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
WCC III Main Menu Tool Bar
Plot
When data is available to graph, for example, in the Trend Logs
screens, you can select <Action>,<Plot> and the data will be
plotted on a graph. This works the same as pressing <Ctrl><G>.
Search Description
At any time while running WCC III, you can search for a description.
Select <Action>,<Search Description>. The following window
will appear:
Reset
While in the Trend Log screens, you can select <Action>,<Reset>
to reset the screen. This works the same as pressing <Ctrl><R>
Set Color
At any time when running WCC III, you can change your screen
colors. Select <Action>,<Set Color> and the following window
will appear:
Enter your description in the Description field and then select
example in the window shows a search for
Room. When the Search is complete, double click on the result you
want to look at and its screen will appear. To return to the Search
Description Screen, press <Home>.
<Start Search>. The
Search Logic Address
At any time while running WCC III, you can search for a logic
address. Select <Action>,<Search Logic Address>. The Search
Logic Address Window will appear:
3-6
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
WCC III Main Menu Tool Bar
When you click inside the Search For field, the Edit Logic Address
Dialog Window will appear:
You can select by Satellite Number and Point Number or by Global
Index and then select <OK>. Your selection should appear in the
Search For field in the Search Logic Address Window. Then click
<Start Search>. When the Search is complete, double click on
the result you want to look at, and its screen will appear. To return
to the Search Logic Address Screen, press <Home>.
Logic Address Tree
The Logic Address Tree allows you to see how the system
connects together. At any time while running WCC III, you can
select <Action>,<Logic Address Tree>. The Edit Logic Address
Dialog Window will appear. See window above.
You can select by Satellite Number and Point Number or by
Global Index and then select <OK>. Your selection will appear in
the Logic Address Tree View Window.
Double-click the left mouse button to expand and collapse the tree.
Click the right mouse button to go to that data point’s screen.
WCC III Technical Guide
Auto E-mail
Auto e-mail enables/disables emails in the Backtask program. You
must be a Level 4 user to access this option.
PassLevel
The PassLevel is a quick way to change a person’s passcode
level. Select <PassLevel> from the Main Menu Toolbar. The Set
Password Dialog Box will appear:
Enter the Operator ID and Code. They will appear as asterisks
for security purposes. Click <Check Password> to verify the
password and display the designated level access.
You can also access this operation in the System Parameters
Screen.
Help
The <Help> menu displays the About Wcc3 window which
contains the version number of the software along with WattMaster
Control’s company information. It is important to know the version
number when calling WattMaster Control’s Technical Support.
Select <OK> to exit the window.
3-7
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Special Purpose Keys
Special Purpose Keys
The special purpose keys are a very powerful and necessary part of
the WCC III system, but they can also be very dangerous if you are
not sure how to use them. Therefore, most of the special purpose
keys require that the operator have a Level 3 passcode.
<Ctrl><A>: Acknowledge Alarms—Used at the Analog
Input Summary Screen, Trend Log Run Time Screen, Alarm
Summary Screen, and Global Analog/Binary Summary Screen.
<Ctrl><G>: Display Graphs—Used at the Analog Trend
Screen, Proportional Reset Screen, and the Look-up Table
Screen to plot data.
<Ctrl><K>: Clear Communication Errors—Used at
Satellite Summary Screen for troubleshooting, clears
communication errors on a single satellite.
<Ctrl><R>: Manually Reset (Clear) Data—Used at the
Trend Log Screen, Global Analog Integral Mode to reset
accumulated consumption, Energy Consumption Screen to
reset consumption.
<Ctrl><Home>: Clear Input Data from Present Screen
(clear structure)—Cursor must be in the Home position on the
screen.
<Ctrl><U> Toggle Updating—Used on Custom Screens and
Bitmap Screens to “freeze/unfreeze” the data being displayed.
<Ctrl><F> Find Logic Address—Used on Custom Screens
and Bitmap Screens to find the exact location where a point
was placed on the screen.
<Ctrl><D> Delete Logic Address—Used on Custom
Screens and Bitmap Screens to delete the location where a
point was placed on the screen.
3-8
<Ctrl><A>: Acknowledge Alarms
When an alarm occurs within the system, the alarm condition
appears on its respective summary screen as a flashing display
generally on the right side of the screen. Once the alarm has been
acknowledged, one of two possible conditions will be displayed.
The first condition is when an alarm is acknowledged, but the
alarm remains outside of the alarm limits. When this happens, the
alarm information is still displayed on the screen, but it appears
solid instead of blinking. The second condition is when an alarm
is acknowledged AND the alarm is inside the alarm limits. In
this case, all alarm information for that point is cleared from the
screen.
To acknowledge new (blinking) alarms, position the cursor (>)
at the point for which you wish to acknowledge alarms. Once
positioned, press and hold <Ctrl>, then press <A>, and then release
both keys at the same time.
<Ctrl><G>: Display Graphs
The WCC III system has graphs for the Analog Trend Screen, the
Proportional Reset Screen, and the Look-Up Table Screen that can
be displayed on the screen and can be printed on the printer using
the <File>, <Print> command.
The graph for the Analog Trend - Trend Logging Screen is accessed
while the cursor is at the Home position of an Analog Trend Screen.
Press <Ctrl><G>. Press the <Home> key to return to the Analog
Trend Screen.
The Proportional Reset Screen also has a graph that can be
accessed by pressing <Ctrl><G> while the cursor is anywhere on
the Proportional Reset Screen. Press the <Home> key to return to
the Proportional Reset Screen.
To access the graph for the Look-Up Tables (GA 121-128), while
the cursor is at any position on a Global Analog Look-Up Table,
press <Ctrl><G> to display the Look-Up Table graph. Press the
<Home> key to return to the Global Analog Look-Up Table.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Special Purpose Keys
<Ctrl><K>: Clear Communication Errors
The WCC III system keeps track of the transmission and receive
errors between the MCD Internet appliance and the satellite
controllers on the Satellite Summary Screen. The <Ctrl><K>
feature clears the existing number of errors and is used for troubleshooting purposes.
<Ctrl><R>: Reset Trend Logs or Global Analog
Accumulation Screens
<Ctrl><Home>: Clear Input Data from Present Screen
You must be a Level 3 user for <Ctrl><Home> to work. <Each
screen (or point) has data which is saved in the memory of the
MCD or the satellite controller. Before any processing of the data
entered on a screen is performed, the system checks the point’s
“structure valid” indicator to insure that the data it contains is valid
and properly formed. If the point is not valid, then that point is
skipped and processing continues with the next point. In addition,
all summary data is removed from that point’s summary screen.
When you are at a Trend Logging Screen and wish to reset (clear)
the existing trend log data on the particular screen, simply press
<Ctrl><R>. This should automatically reset (clear) the data on the
Trend Log Screen. On new systems, the Trend Log Screens should
be reset before they have been programmed to clear out any “bad
data” that might be in the satellite controller.
To clear a screen (invalidate it), the cursor must be in the “Home”
position on the individual screen that is to be cleared. Once there,
press <Ctrl><Home>. The data on the screen should be cleared
away. Once you have cleared a point, the data for that point is lost,
and it cannot be recovered. Therefore, make sure you have the
right point before using <Ctrl><Home>.
The <Ctrl><R> feature is also used to reset the global analogs
using the integral mode and the Energy Consumption Screen.
<Ctrl-U>: Toggle Updating
If the system is trying to e-mail-out an alarm and it cannot report
its information for some reason, the system will continue to try and
e-mail the call-out forever unless you press <Ctrl><R> while the
cursor is at the “Disabled by” position for that alarm type on the
System Parameters Screen.
The values of the WCC III points on the Custom Screen are
“dynamic.” That is, the values on the screen will change as the
value of the point changes. However, you have the option of
“freezing” the points at their present value by pressing <Ctrl>
and <U> while the Custom Screen is displayed on the monitor. To
return to “live” data, press <Ctrl> and <U> again.
<Ctrl-F> and <Ctrl-D>: Delete a Point Address on the
Custom Screen
To delete a point on the Custom Screen, first you must have the
cursor in the exact location it was when the point was placed
on the screen. To simplify finding this location, you may move
the cursor near the existing point and then press <Ctrl> and <F>
simultaneously to cause the cursor to move to the exact position
where the point was created. You may delete the point by pressing
<Ctrl> and <D> simultaneously, and then pressing <Enter>. The
four slashes (////) will then appear. You may enter a new point, or to
remove the slashes, leave the screen by pressing <Home> twice,
and then re-access the screen.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-9
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Main Menu Screen
MAIN MENU SCREEN
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
08:11
1/20
WATTMASTER CONTROL CENTER III
WCC III
Sat #____
Analog Input
Control Output
Analog Output
Trend Logs
Logic Switches
Binary Output
Overview
Alarm Summary
Satellite Summary
Overrides
Holidays
System Parameters
On/Off/Units Messages
Alarm Messages
Secure the System
Energy Consumption
Custom Screens
Bitmap Screens
Network Information
Central Unit
PID Programs
Week Schedules
Optimal Starts
Analog Globals
Binary Globals
Shed/Restore Programs
Duty Cycle Programs
Proportional Programs
Tenant Override
General Message
Active alarms in classes: 16
WCC III Version 2.21
BACKTASK Version 2.18 L
The Main Menu Screen allows you to view the available screens
within the WCC III system. To get to a screen listed on the Main
Menu, use the arrow keys to position the cursor over the name of
the screen you want to access and press <Enter>.
The Main Menu is divided into three categories: Sat #, Overview,
and Central Unit.
Sat #____
The information associated with the screens within this category is
stored in the satellite controllers and IS NOT stored in the MCD.
It is a very good idea to save this information on a back-up disk
by using the Satellite Save/Restore program located in the WCC
Utility Program.
Overview
This section allows the operator to perform operations and view
screens which affect all of the satellite controllers on the system.
3-10
The information associated with the screens located in this
category is stored in the MCD. When the screens in this category
are programmed for the first time, or when a change is made to
these screens, the system automatically stores the information on
the data disk.
Central Unit
The screens located in this category are GLOBAL commands.
Global commands “travel” along the two-wire communication
loop and are used by any or all of the satellite controllers. All of
the satellites are constantly monitoring this information but only
certain satellites will react to the information depending on how
they have been programmed. The information associated with the
screens located in this category is stored in the MCD. When the
screens in this category are programmed for the first time or when
a change is made to these screens, the system automatically stores
the information on the hard drive disk.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Main Menu Screen
Active alarms in classes:
If an alarm is active within the system, the alarm type number will
appear at this location. You will need to go to the Alarm Summary
Screen to locate the specific alarm.
If the alarm is highlighted, it has not been acknowledged. If the
number is not highlighted, all of the alarms in that class have been
acknowledged.
WCC III Version _.__
BACKTASK Version _.__
The version number of the software presently being used by the
WCC III system will appear at these locations. Backtask is a
portion of the WCC III software. Each version of the WCC III
software operates with a specific version of Backtask. This has
been added to insure that the right version of Backtask is operating
with the WCC III software.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-11
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Summary Screen
Analog Input Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXAY, where XXX = Satellite Address, A = Analog Input, and Y = 1-8
ANALOG INPUT SUMMARY SCREEN
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Analog Inputs
Satellite 1
S1-KC
Analog Inputs
Current Value
Alarm Limits
Stat Mode
50.0 Deg F
65.0
80.0
ON
0
Deg F
45.0
65.0
OFF
0
Deg F
-10.0
100.0
ON
0
Deg F
45.0
100.0
ON
Description
A1: S1-A1
A2: S1-A2
A3: S1-A3
A4: S1-A4
A5: S1-A5
A6: S1-A6
A7: S1-A7
A8: S1-A8
9.0
99.0
C1:
C2:
C3:
C4:
C5:
C6:
C7:
C8:
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Time
08:22
Alarm
Date
01/20
Details
Deg F
Deg F
HOME for menu
An analog input is a signal sent to the satellite controller that can
be represented by a number such as temperature, pressure, etc.
The Analog Input Screen is used to “tell” the WCC III system the
characteristics of the sensor and to set alarm limits. The “Binary
Setpoint” option at the bottom of the Analog Input Screen can be
used to convert the analog input to a binary (On/Off) input.
Analog Inputs
Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a
“choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the
bottom of the screen:
<Analog Input, Control Output, Analog Output,
Trend Logging, Logic Switch, Binary Output>
You can access one of the screens which appear in this choice field
without returning to the Main Menu by pressing the <space bar>
until the desired summary type has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
3-12
Satellite______
Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently
communicating with. If you would like to view the analog input
summary data for a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move
the cursor to this field, enter the desired satellite number, and press
<Enter>. 1 to 239.
To view or edit a specific analog input, use the arrow keys to move
the cursor (shown as “>” along the left-hand side of the screen) to
the desired point and press <Enter>. The Analog Input Screen for
the specified point will now appear.
Time / Date
The present time and date will automatically appear at these
locations.
Description:_______________
The description message which was entered on the Analog Input
Screen is displayed here to help you identify the different analog
inputs within the system.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Summary Screen
Current Value
Mode
The current value of the analog input is automatically displayed
here.
The “alt” message will appear here when the alternate alarm limits
are active. When the input value which has been entered on the
Analog Input Screen to select the alternate alarm limits is “ON,”
the WCC III system will use the “Alternate Alarm Limits” and the
“alt” message will be displayed here.
Alarm Limits
The alarm limits which were input on the Analog Input Screens
will automatically be displayed here.
Stat
The present “ON” or “OFF” status of the binary input which is
controlling the schedule for the alarm limits is shown here. For
example, if week schedule #1 (W1) has been input to control
the schedule of the alarm limits, the message “ON” will appear
here when week schedule #1 is “ON” and “OFF” will appear
when week schedule #1 is “OFF”. When W1 is “ON” the “On
Schedule” alarm limits will be active, and when W1 if “OFF” the
Off Schedule” alarm limits will be active.
Alarm Details
This location will automatically display the alarm message, the
high or low value of the analog input, and the time and date of the
occurrence of the peak value.
When an alarm occurs, the alarm message will blink on the screen.
To acknowledge an alarm, position the cursor at the point for
which you wish to acknowledge the alarm. Then press <Alt><A>
or left-click on <Action> to bring up the <Action> menu at which
point you can select <Acknowledge Alarm> or <Acknowledge
All Alarms>.
NOTE: The <Acknowledge All Alarms> option will
only work on the Alarm Summary Screen.
At this point, one of two things should happen. If the value of
the analog input is presently within the alarm limits, the message
will disappear. If the value of the analog input is not within the
alarm limits, the message will stay on the screen, but it will quit
blinking.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-13
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input General Screen
Analog Input Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXAY, where XXX = Satellite Address, A = Analog Input, and Y = 1-8
ANALOG INPUT GENERAL SCREEN
Satellite #
1
ANALOG INPUT #
1
Description: RM101
Type: Analog
General
Pattern for values associated with this input: xxx.x
Units @ 0% scale:
0.0 DEG.
Units of Measure message #: 1
@ full scale: 100.0 DEG.
Filter time constant: 8 seconds
ALARMS
Controlled by:
W1
Alarm Type: 1
Alarm Message #’s:
Low
2
High
1
Alternate limits selected by: ....
Limit overlap time
after control change:
20 minutes
OFF Above
OFF Below
Limits
On
Off
Low
65.0
50.0
On (alt)
Off (alt)
0.0
0.0
Local set
55.0
BINARY SETPOINT
0.0 DEG.
0.0 DEG.
On Message #:
Off Message #:
High
80.0
100.0
DEG.
DEG.
0.0
0.0
DEG.
DEG.
90.0
DEG.
0
0
HOME for menu
Satellite # _______
Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently
editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow
keys to move the cursor to this field, type in the desired satellite
number, and press <Enter>.
Additionally, this field specifies the point number to edit. For the
Analog Input Screen, this number can range from one to eight,
corresponding from A1 to A8, respectively. If you would like to
edit a different point, move the cursor to this field by using the
arrow keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>.
Analog Input # ________
Description:
This “field” actually contains two separate fields. The first field
specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog
output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because
this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed
at the bottom of the screen:
A short message is entered here which is displayed on Summary
Screens to help you remember points within the system. You may
enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double
quote character are not allowed).
<ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT,
TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. (If you select
a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the
screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.)
3-14
Type: Analog General
This field is automatically filled in by the system. On screens 2-8,
this will always read “ANALOG.” On screen number 1, it will
read either “ANALOG” or “PULSE” depending on the position of
the pulse switch on the satellite controller.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input General Screen
Sensor Type
This is a choice field for Analog types only. A list of available
choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<General, Thermistor, Resistor,
Resistor+, RawCount, Thermistor+>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired Analog Type has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
General = A general use user programmable analog input screen.
Pulse = Specifies the calibration information for the pulse meter
connected to channel 1 of the satellite controller.
Units
@ 0% scale:
@ Full scale:
If the screen type is “ANALOG,” this specifies the scaling
information used by the system to proportionally scale the input
value to the desired range. The raw input value to the satellite
controller ranges from zero to one volt. If the scaling information
has been set to 0 at 0% scale, and 100 at Full scale, a raw input
value of 0.6 volts would produce a scaled value of 60.
If the screen type is “PULSE,” this specifies the calibration
information for the pulse meter connected to channel 1 of the
satellite controller. The first input is a “choice” field, and therefore
a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the
screen.
_______ Pulses = _______ Hours
Thermistor = Used to setup WattMaster 10K type 3 curve
thermistors.
Resistor = Used to measure resistance of a variable potentiometer.
Resistor+ = Used to setup different types of thermistors.
WattMaster thermistors are 10K type 3 curve. You would enter
values on the screen to correspond to different values and type
curves of thermistors.
RawCount = Is the raw count value straight from the 12 bit A to D
converter. Used for testing and or calibrating to see if the analog
signal is linear, so that you may test the non-linear curve of any
sensor to determine if any offset is needed.
Thermistor+ = To be used if you are using a thermistor type sensor
that WattMaster Controls has not provided. Other thermistor type
sensors can be connected to the Satellite controller’s analog inputs
with this screen. Please consult the WattMaster Controls factory
for all other thermistor type sensors that you wish to connect to the
Satellite Controller. WattMaster Controls can provide the correct
b0, b1, b3 values at our option.
Pattern for Values Associated With This Input:
Specifies where you would like the decimal point to appear in the
value displayed by the system. Because this is a “choice” field,
a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the
screen:
< x,xxx , xxx.x , xx.xx , x.xxx >
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar>
until the desired data pattern has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
< 100, 1000 >
The second input is used to “scale” or “calibrate” the particular
sensor that is being used. For example, consider a pulse meter
which measures the kwh of a building. Electrical meters are
basically a small motor whose speed is proportional to power
being used. Let’s consider a meter where one revolution equals
one kwh, and the meter sends 5 pulses to the satellite controller for
every 6 revolutions. Therefore, we would enter “100 Pulses = 120
kwh Hours.” (NOTE: maximum pulse rate allowed = 4 pulses per
second.)
5 pulses = 6 revolutions
1 revolution = 1 kwh
5 pulses = 6 kwh
100 pulses = 120 kwh
Units of Measure Message #: 1
A number is entered here that references a message on the On/Off
Units Messages Screen. For example, if units-of-measure message
#1 is “Deg F,” entering “1” will cause “Deg F” to be displayed as
the units-of-measure for the analog input.
Filter Time Constant: ____ Seconds
Specifies the sampling rate of the analog input. This is used by the
satellites to “filter” (or smooth) the analog input signal. This can be
used on inputs that “jump around” to reduce sporadic load control.
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
< 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 >
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired filter time constant has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-15
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input General Screen
------ALARMS------
Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for LOW alarms and
the second for any HIGH alarms. These numbers are used by
the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm
Message Screen.
There are two fields on this screen that determine which set of
limits are active—the status of the “Controlled by” field and the
status of the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. When the value
that has been input in the “Controlled by” field is ON, either the
“On” limits or the “On (Alt)” limits are active depending on the
status of the value input in the “Alternate Limits selected by” field.
If the value in the “Alternate” field is On, the “On (Alt)” limits are
used, and when the “Alternate” value is OFF, the “On” limits are
used.
Alternate Limits
Active Alarm
Controlled by:
Selected by:
Limits:
On
Off
On
On
On
On (Alt)
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off (Alt)
The local set alarm limits become active if the MCD quits
communicating with the satellite controller. After communications
are re-established, any alarms that occurred while the satellite was
in local set will be reported.
Alternate Limits Selected By:
Limit overlap time after control change:
Specifies the point that initiates the Alternate mode. When this
address is zero (or OFF), the Normal alarm limits are selected;
when it is one (or ON), the Alternate alarm limits are selected.
This specifies the amount of time the WCC software will wait after
a control change (i.e., on/off schedule, alternate mode, local set
mode) before deciding to generate an alarm. The first input is a
user-entered number from 1 to 60, and the second input is either
seconds or minutes. This second input is a “choice” field; the list
of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Controlled by:
Specifies the binary value that selects the ON or OFF alarm limits.
When this value is OFF, the OFF alarm limits are selected; when it
is ON, the ON alarm limits are selected.
Alarm Type:
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
Alarm Message # Low: ___ High: ___
Limits
On
Off
On (alt)
Off (alt)
Local Set
Low
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
High
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
<Seconds, Minutes>
This group of inputs specifies the alarm limits for the “Normal,”
“Alternate,” and “Local Set” modes. Each mode has a LOW and
HIGH limit. When the value of the analog input goes out of these
limits, an alarm is generated, and the alarm will automatically
display and e-mail out.
3-16
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input General Screen
------ BINARY SETPOINTS -----____Above:____
____Below:____
<ON, OFF>
These inputs are used to convert the analog signal to a binary (On/
Off) signal. The value that is going ON and OFF is a software point
referred to as a comparator. Each analog input has a comparator
associated with it named “Cn.” The comparator for analog input #1
is “C1,” analog input number 2 is “C2,” and so on. The status of the
comparator can be seen on the Analog Input Summary Screen.
When the
user has
selected:
Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
The value of the comparator is:
OFF Above &
OFF Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than the
ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint,
and ON when the Analog Input value is equal to
either one or between the two setpoints.
OFF Above &
ON Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than
or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog
Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint,
and ON when the Analog Input value is less than or
equal to BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input
value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint.
ON Above &
OFF Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is less than or
equal to the BELOW setpoint or until the Analog
Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE
setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is
greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or
until the Analog Input value becomes less than the
BELOW setpoint.
ON Above &
ON Below:
OFF when the Analog input value is equal to either
one or between the two setpoints, and ON when
the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE
setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint.
WCC III Technical Guide
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired choice is selected and then pressing <Enter>.
On Message #:
Off Message #:
Specifies a pair of message numbers, the first for the ON state and
the second for the OFF state of the comparator. These numbers
are used by the system to reference a message on the ON/OFF
Units Message Screen. For example, the comparator might be set
up to come on when the outside air temperature is below 55 °F for
economizer operation. Set up the On/Off Message Screen so that
message #3 is “ECON” and message #4 is “REFRIG.” The “On
Message” number would be “3” (ECON), and the “OFF Message”
number would be “4” (REFRIG).
3-17
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Pulse Screen
Analog Input Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXAY, where XXX = Satellite Address, A = Analog Input, and Y = 1-8
ANALOG INPUT PULSE SCREEN
Satellite # _______
Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently
editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow
keys to move the cursor to this field, type in the desired satellite
number, and press <Enter>.
Analog Input # ________
This “field” actually contains two separate fields. The first field
specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog
output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because
this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed
at the bottom of the screen:
<ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT,
TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. (If you select
a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the
screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.)
3-18
Additionally, this field specifies the point number to edit. For the
Analog Input Screen, this number can range from one to eight,
corresponding from A1 to A8, respectively. If you would like to
edit a different point, move the cursor to this field by using the
arrow keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>.
Description:
A short message is entered here which is displayed on Summary
Screens to help you remember points within the system. You
may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the
double quote character are not allowed).
Type: Pulse
This field is automatically filled in by the system. On screens 2-8,
this will always read “ANALOG.” On screen number 1, it will
read either “ANALOG” or “PULSE” depending on the position
of the pulse switch on the satellite controller.
Pulse specifies the calibration information for the pulse meter
connected to channel 1 of the satellite controller.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Pulse Screen
Pattern for Values Associated With This Input:
Filter Time Constant: ____ Seconds
Specifies where you would like the decimal point to appear in the
value displayed by the system. Because this is a “choice” field,
a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the
screen:
Specifies the sampling rate of the analog input. This is used by the
satellites to “filter” (or smooth) the analog input signal. This can be
used on inputs that “jump around” to reduce sporadic load control.
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
< x,xxx , xxx.x , xx.xx , x.xxx >
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar>
until the desired data pattern has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
Units of Measure Message #: 2
A number is entered here that references a message on the On/Off
Units Messages Screen. For example, if units-of-measure message
#2 is “Deg F,” entering “2” will cause “Deg F” to be displayed as
the units-of-measure for the analog input.
100 Pulses = 120 KW Hours
If the screen type is “ANALOG,” this specifies the scaling
information used by the system to proportionally scale the input
value to the desired range. The raw input value to the satellite
controller ranges from zero to one volt. If the scaling information
has been set to 0 at 0% scale, and 100 at Full scale, a raw input
value of 0.6 volts would produce a scaled value of 60.
If the screen type is “PULSE,” this specifies the calibration
information for the pulse meter connected to channel 1 of the
satellite controller.
_______ Pulses = _______ Hours
The first input is a “choice” field, and therefore a list of available
choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
< 100, 1000 >
< 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 >
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired filter time constant has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
------ALARMS-----Controlled by:
Specifies the binary value that selects the ON or OFF alarm limits.
When this value is OFF, the OFF alarm limits are selected; when it
is ON, the ON alarm limits are selected.
Alarm Type:
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
Alarm Message # Low: ___ High: ___
Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for LOW alarms and
the second for any HIGH alarms. These numbers are used by
the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm
Message Screen.
Alternate Limits Selected By:
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired amount of pulses has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
Specifies the point that initiates the Alternate mode. When this
address is zero (or OFF), the Normal alarm limits are selected;
when it is one (or ON), the Alternate alarm limits are selected.
The second input is used to “scale” or “calibrate” the particular
sensor that is being used. For example, consider a pulse meter
which measures the kwh of a building. Electrical meters are
basically a small motor whose speed is proportional to power
being used. Let’s consider a meter where one revolution equals
one kwh, and the meter sends 5 pulses to the satellite controller for
every 6 revolutions. Therefore, we would enter “100 Pulses = 120
kwh Hours.” (NOTE: maximum pulse rate allowed = 4 pulses per
second.)
Limits
On
Off
On (alt)
Off (alt)
Local Set
5 pulses = 6 revolutions
1 revolution = 1 kwh
5 pulses = 6 kwh
100 pulses = 120 kwh
WCC III Technical Guide
Low
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
High
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
This group of inputs specifies the alarm limits for the “Normal,”
“Alternate,” and “Local Set” modes. Each mode has a LOW and
HIGH limit. When the value of the analog input goes out of these
limits, an alarm is generated, and the alarm will automatically
display and e-mail out.
3-19
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Pulse Screen
There are two fields on this screen that determine which set of
limits are active—the status of the “Controlled by” field and the
status of the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. When the value
that has been input in the “Controlled by” field is ON, either the
“On” limits or the “On (Alt)” limits are active depending on the
status of the value input in the “Alternate Limits selected by” field.
If the value in the “Alternate” field is On, the “On (Alt)” limits are
used, and when the “Alternate” value is OFF, the “On” limits are
used.
Alternate Limits
Active Alarm
Controlled by:
Selected by:
Limits:
On
Off
On
On
On
On (Alt)
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off (Alt)
The local set alarm limits become active if the MCD quits
communicating with the satellite controller. After communications
are re-established, any alarms that occurred while the satellite was
in local set will be reported.
------ BINARY SETPOINTS -----____Above:____
____Below:____
These inputs are used to convert the analog signal to a binary (On/
Off) signal. The value that is going ON and OFF is a software point
referred to as a comparator. Each analog input has a comparator
associated with it named “Cn.” The comparator for analog input
#1 is “C1,” analog input number 2 is “C2,” and so on. The status of
the comparator can be seen on the Analog Input Summary Screen.
When the
user has
selected:
OFF Above &
OFF Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than the
ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint,
and ON when the Analog Input value is equal to
either one or between the two setpoints.
OFF Above &
ON Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than
or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog
Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint,
and ON when the Analog Input value is less than or
equal to BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input
value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint.
ON Above &
OFF Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is less than or
equal to the BELOW setpoint or until the Analog
Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE
setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is
greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or
until the Analog Input value becomes less than the
BELOW setpoint.
ON Above &
ON Below:
OFF when the Analog input value is equal to either
one or between the two setpoints, and ON when
the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE
setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint.
Limit overlap time after control change:
This specifies the amount of time the WCC software will wait after
a control change (i.e., on/off schedule, alternate mode, local set
mode) before deciding to generate an alarm. The first input is a
user-entered number from 1 to 60, and the second input is either
seconds or minutes. This second input is a “choice” field; the list
of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
The value of the comparator is:
<Seconds, Minutes>
Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<ON, OFF>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired choice is selected and then pressing <Enter>.
On Message #:
Off Message #:
Specifies a pair of message numbers, the first for the ON state and
the second for the OFF state of the comparator. These numbers
are used by the system to reference a message on the ON/OFF
Units Message Screen. For example, the comparator might be set
up to come on when the outside air temperature is below 55 °F for
economizer operation. Set up the On/Off Message Screen so that
message #3 is “ECON” and message #4 is “REFRIG.” The “On
Message” number would be “3” (ECON), and the “OFF Message”
number would be “4” (REFRIG).
3-20
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Thermistor Screen
Analog Input Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXAY, where XXX = Satellite Address, A = Analog Input, and Y = 1-8
ANALOG INPUT THERMISTOR SCREEN
Satellite # _______
Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently
editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow
keys to move the cursor to this field, type in the desired satellite
number, and press <Enter>.
Additionally, this field specifies the point number to edit. For the
Analog Input Screen, this number can range from one to eight,
corresponding from A1 to A8, respectively. If you would like to
edit a different point, move the cursor to this field by using the
arrow keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>.
Analog Input # ________
Description:
This “field” actually contains two separate fields. The first field
specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog
output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because
this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed
at the bottom of the screen:
A short message is entered here which is displayed on Summary
Screens to help you remember points within the system. You
may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the
double quote character are not allowed).
<ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT,
TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. (If you select
a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the
screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.)
WCC III Technical Guide
Type: Analog Thermistor
This field is automatically filled in by the system. On screens 2-8,
this will always read “ANALOG.” On screen number 1, it will
read either “ANALOG” or “PULSE” depending on the position
of the pulse switch on the satellite controller.
3-21
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Thermistor Screen
Sensor Type
Offset:
This is a choice field for Analog types only. A list of available
choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
There is an option to change the calibration of a thermistor sensor
(Usually due to the position or location of the thermistor sensor)
a few degrees plus or minus from the actual temperature that the
thermistor sensor is actually reading. Acceptable values in this
field are numerical with both positive and negative (+/-) values.
<General, Thermistor, Resistor,
Resistor+, RawCount, Thermistor+>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired Analog Type has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
Thermistor = Used to setup WattMaster 10K type 3 curve
thermistors.
NOTE:
The associated analog input jumper on the satellite
controller must also be set to “THERM” in order for this
screen to display the proper temperature value.
Pattern for Values Associated With This Input:
Specifies where you would like the decimal point to appear in the
value displayed by the system. Because this is a “choice” field,
a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the
screen:
Units of Measure Message #: 1
A number is entered here that references a message on the On/Off
Units Messages Screen. For example, if units-of-measure message
#1 is “Deg F,” entering “1” will cause “Deg F” to be displayed as
the units-of-measure for the analog input.
Filter Time Constant: ____ Seconds
Specifies the sampling rate of the analog input. This is used by the
satellites to “filter” (or smooth) the analog input signal. This can be
used on inputs that “jump around” to reduce sporadic load control.
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
< 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 >
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired filter time constant has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
< x,xxx , xxx.x , xx.xx , x.xxx >
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar>
until the desired data pattern has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
------ALARMS-----Controlled by:
Specifies the binary value that selects the ON or OFF alarm limits.
When this value is OFF, the OFF alarm limits are selected; when it
is ON, the ON alarm limits are selected.
Degree Type:
Specifies how you would like the temperature displayed, in
Fahrenheit or Celsius. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
< ºF, ºC >
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired temperature choice has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
Alarm Type:
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
Alarm Message # Low: ___ High: ___
Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for LOW alarms and
the second for any HIGH alarms. These numbers are used by
the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm
Message Screen.
Alternate Limits Selected By:
Specifies the point that initiates the Alternate mode. When this
address is zero (or OFF), the Normal alarm limits are selected;
when it is one (or ON), the Alternate alarm limits are selected.
3-22
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Thermistor Screen
Limits
On
Off
On (alt)
Off (alt)
Local Set
Low
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
High
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
This group of inputs specifies the alarm limits for the “Normal,”
“Alternate,” and “Local Set” modes. Each mode has a LOW and
HIGH limit. When the value of the analog input goes out of these
limits, an alarm is generated, and the alarm will automatically
display and e-mail out.
There are two fields on this screen that determine which set of
limits are active—the status of the “Controlled by” field and the
status of the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. When the value
that has been input in the “Controlled by” field is ON, either the
“On” limits or the “On (Alt)” limits are active depending on the
status of the value input in the “Alternate Limits selected by” field.
If the value in the “Alternate” field is On, the “On (Alt)” limits are
used, and when the “Alternate” value is OFF, the “On” limits are
used.
Alternate Limits
Active Alarm
Controlled by:
Selected by:
Limits:
On
Off
On
On
On
On (Alt)
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off (Alt)
The local set alarm limits become active if the MCD quits
communicating with the satellite controller. After communications
are re-established, any alarms that occurred while the satellite was
in local set will be reported.
Limit overlap time after control change:
This specifies the amount of time the WCC software will wait after
a control change (i.e., on/off schedule, alternate mode, local set
mode) before deciding to generate an alarm. The first input is a
user-entered number from 1 to 60, and the second input is either
seconds or minutes. This second input is a “choice” field; the list
of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Seconds, Minutes>
------ BINARY SETPOINTS -----____Above:____
____Below:____
These inputs are used to convert the analog signal to a binary (On/
Off) signal. The value that is going ON and OFF is a software point
referred to as a comparator. Each analog input has a comparator
associated with it named “Cn.” The comparator for analog input
#1 is “C1,” analog input number 2 is “C2,” and so on. The status of
the comparator can be seen on the Analog Input Summary Screen.
When the
user has
selected:
The value of the comparator is:
OFF Above &
OFF Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than the
ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint,
and ON when the Analog Input value is equal to
either one or between the two setpoints.
OFF Above &
ON Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than
or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog
Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint,
and ON when the Analog Input value is less than or
equal to BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input
value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint.
ON Above &
OFF Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is less than or
equal to the BELOW setpoint or until the Analog
Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE
setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is
greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or
until the Analog Input value becomes less than the
BELOW setpoint.
ON Above &
ON Below:
OFF when the Analog input value is equal to either
one or between the two setpoints, and ON when
the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE
setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint.
Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<ON, OFF>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired choice is selected and then pressing <Enter>.
On Message #:
Off Message #:
Specifies a pair of message numbers, the first for the ON state and
the second for the OFF state of the comparator. These numbers
are used by the system to reference a message on the ON/OFF
Units Message Screen. For example, the comparator might be set
up to come on when the outside air temperature is below 55 °F for
economizer operation. Set up the On/Off Message Screen so that
message #3 is “ECON” and message #4 is “REFRIG.” The “On
Message” number would be “3” (ECON), and the “OFF Message”
number would be “4” (REFRIG).
WCC III Technical Guide
3-23
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Screen
3-24
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Screen
2 WIRE THERMISTOR TYPE - Thermistor Scaling Factor
FLUSHMOUNT SENSOR (WM PART # OE210)
10K OHM
TYPE 3
THERMISTOR
+V
1 TO 8
ATI
YS101724
REV. 0
R1
TB1
TM
GND
AUX
OUT
NONE
LOAD
RESISTOR
T
SHLD
R
RV2
GND
TB2
C1
1 TO 8
S1
V
OUT
CONNECTIONS ON
SAT III CONTROLLER
RV1
P1
JOX
Identify the Sensor
Circuit Board YS#
YS101724
WCC III Technical Guide
THERM
0-10V
0-5V
0-1V
ANALOG INPUT SCALING - From Sat Analog Input Screen
Description:
Type: Thermistor
Pattern for values associated with this input: xxx.x
Degree Type: F
Units of measure message#: 1
Filter time constant: 0 Seconds
An Input Load Resistor must not be used. Internally, the SAT III
controller calculates the resistance of the thermistor back to a Voltage so
that the SAT III controller can calculate the proper temperature. RX
corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input load resistor. Example as
follows:
R1 is for Analog Input #1 (NO RESISTOR SHOULD BE INSTALLED)
R8 is for Analog Input #8 (NO RESISTOR SHOULD BE INSTALLED)
Testing with an Ohmmeter:
Disconnected from the SAT III controller, measure from TMP to GND
on the sensor. You should get an ohm meter measurement that
corresponds to the Temperature. 10,000 ohms equals 77.0 DegF
Input Jumper must be set to THERM
There are berg jumpers that are under the SAT III cover that must be set.
JOX corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input jumper.
Example:
JO1 is for Analog Input #1
JO8 is for Analog Input #8
3-25
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Screen
3 WIRE VOLTAGE TYPE - 0 to 1 Volt Scaling Factor
FLUSHMOUNT SENSOR (WM PART # OE222)
+V
1 TO 8
R3
R2
TB1
C1
TMP
ATI
ORANGE
WIRE
BROWN
WIRE
ATI
NONE
LOAD
RESISTOR
RV1
GND
TB1
R1
U1
YS101545
REV. 2
VIOLET
WIRE
AUX
OUT
GND
C2
S1
LM-34 Type
Temp Sensor
1 TO 8
V
OUT
RV2
ANALOG INPUT SCALING - From Sat Analog Input Screen
Description:
Type: Analog General
Pattern for values associated with this input: xxx.x
Units @ 0 % Scale
0.0 DegF Units of measure message #: 1
@ full scale: 100.0 DegF
Filter time constant: 8 Seconds
An Input Load Resistor must not be used to convert the Voltage so that the
SAT III controller can calculate the proper temperature. RX
corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input load resistor. Example as
follows:
R1 is for Analog Input #1 (NO RESISTOR SHOULD BE INSTALLED)
R8 is for Analog Input #8 (NO RESISTOR SHOULD BE INSTALLED)
Testing with a voltmeter:
Measure from ATI to GND. You should get a voltage measurement that
corresponds to the Temperature. 0.72 Volts DC equals 72.0 Deg F
CONNECTIONS ON
SAT III CONTROLLER
JOX
THERM
0-10V
0-5V
0-1V
Identify the Sensor
Circuit Board YS#
YS101545
Input Jumper must be set to 0-1V
There are berg jumpers that are under the SAT III cover that must be set.
JOX corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input jumper.
Example:
JO1 is for Analog Input #1
JO8 is for Analog Input #8
3 WIRE VOLTAGE TYPE - 0 to 5 Volt Scaling Factor
FLUSHMOUNT SENSOR (WM PART # OE222)
+V
1 TO 8
R3
R2
TB1
C1
TMP
ATI
ORANGE
WIRE
BROWN
WIRE
ATI
NONE
LOAD
RESISTOR
RV1
GND
U1
YS101545
REV. 2
VIOLET
WIRE
AUX
OUT
TB1
R1
GND
C2
S1
LM-34 Type
Temp Sensor
1 TO 8
V
OUT
RV2
CONNECTIONS ON
SAT III CONTROLLER
JOX
Identify the Sensor
Circuit Board YS#
YS101545
3-26
THERM
0-10V
0-5V
0-1V
ANALOG INPUT SCALING - From Sat Analog Input Screen
Description:
Type: Analog General
Pattern for values associated with this input: xxx.x
Units @ 0 % Scale
0.0 Deg F Units of measure message #: 1
@ full scale: 500.0 Deg F
Filter time constant: 8 Seconds
An Input Load Resistor must not be used to convert the Voltage so that the
SAT III controller can calculate the proper temperature. RX
corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input load resistor. Example as
follows:
R1 is for Analog Input #1 (NO RESISTOR SHOULD BE INSTALLED)
R8 is for Analog Input #8 (NO RESISTOR SHOULD BE INSTALLED)
Testing with a voltmeter:
Measure from ATI to GND. You should get a voltage measurement that
corresponds to the Temperature. 0.72 Volts DC equals 72.0 Deg F
Input Jumper must be set to 0-5V
There are berg jumpers that are under the SAT III cover that must be set.
JOX corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input jumper.
Example:
JO1 is for Analog Input #1
JO8 is for Analog Input #8
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Screen
WCC III Technical Guide
3-27
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Screen
3-28
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Screen
WCC III Technical Guide
3-29
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Screen
not
3-30
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Screen
WCC III Technical Guide
3-31
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Screen
ANALOG INPUT AS AN ANALOG SWITCH INPUT - Thermistor Scaling Factor
0-1V INPUT
ANALOG INPUT SCALING - From Sat Analog Input Screen
+V
1 TO 8
ATI
NO
LOAD
RESISTOR
SWITCH
BY OTHERS
GND
1 TO 8
V
OUT
CONNECTIONS ON
SAT III CONTROLLER
JOX
THERM
0-10V
0-5V
0-1V
Description:
Type: Analog General
Pattern for values associated with this input: xxx.x
Units @ 0 % Scale
0.0 Deg F Units of measure message #: 1
@ full scale: 100.0 Deg F
Filter time constant: 0 Seconds
===========Binary Setpoint ===========
OFF above
80.0 Deg F
On Message #: ON
ON below
50.0 Deg F
Off Message #: OFF
An Input Load Resistor must not be used as a pull down resistor, because
the required 5 volts comes from the Thermistor pull up resistor.
RX corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input load resistor.
Example as follows:
R1 is for Analog Input #1
R4 is for Analog Input #4
R6 is for Analog Input #6
R8 is for Analog Input #8
Testing with a voltmeter:
Measure from ATI to GND. You should get a voltage measurement that
corresponds to the ON / OFF. 5.0 Volts DC equals OFF
The V-Out output is not used for this application.
Input Jumper must be set to THERM
There are berg jumpers that are under the SAT III cover that must be set.
JOX corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input jumper.
Example:
JO1 is for Analog Input #1
JO8 is for Analog Input #8
ANALOG INPUT AS AN ANALOG SWITCH INPUT - Thermistor Scaling Factor
0-5V INPUT
ANALOG INPUT SCALING - From Sat Analog Input Screen
+V
1 TO 8
ATI
NO
LOAD
RESISTOR
SWITCH
BY OTHERS
GND
1 TO 8
V
OUT
CONNECTIONS ON
SAT III CONTROLLER
JOX
THERM
0-10V
0-5V
0-1V
3-32
Description:
Type: Analog General
Pattern for values associated with this input: xxx.x
Units @ 0 % Scale
0.0 Deg F Units of measure message #: 1
@ full scale: 500.0 Deg F
Filter time constant: 0 Seconds
===========Binary Setpoint ===========
OFF above
400.0 Deg F
On Message #: ON
ON below
100.0 Deg F
Off Message #: OFF
An Input Load Resistor must not be used as a pull down resistor, because
the required 5 volts comes from the Thermistor pull up resistor.
RX corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input load resistor.
Example as follows:
R1 is for Analog Input #1
R4 is for Analog Input #4
R6 is for Analog Input #6
R8 is for Analog Input #8
Testing with a voltmeter:
Measure from ATI to GND. You should get a voltage measurement that
corresponds to the ON / OFF. 5.0 Volts DC equals OFF
The V-Out output is not used for this application.
Input Jumper must be set to THERM
There are berg jumpers that are under the SAT III cover that must be set.
JOX corresponds to X = 1 to 8 for the Analog Input jumper.
Example:
JO1 is for Analog Input #1
JO8 is for Analog Input #8
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Screen
FOR 0-10 VOLT INPUTS
WCC III Technical Guide
3-33
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Screen
3-34
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Resistor Screen
Analog Input Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXAY, where XXX = Satellite Address, A = Analog Input, and Y = 1-8
ANALOG INPUT RESISTOR SCREEN
Satellite # _______
Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently
editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow
keys to move the cursor to this field, type in the desired satellite
number, and press <Enter>.
Additionally, this field specifies the point number to edit. For the
Analog Input Screen, this number can range from one to eight,
corresponding from A1 to A8, respectively. If you would like to
edit a different point, move the cursor to this field by using the
arrow keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>.
Analog Input # ________
Description:
This “field” actually contains two separate fields. The first field
specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog
output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because
this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed
at the bottom of the screen:
A short message is entered here which is displayed on Summary
Screens to help you remember points within the system. You
may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the
double quote character are not allowed).
<ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT,
TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. (If you select
a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the
screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.)
WCC III Technical Guide
Type: Analog Resistor
This field is automatically filled in by the system. On screens 2-8,
this will always read “ANALOG.” On screen number 1, it will
read either “ANALOG” or “PULSE” depending on the position of
the pulse switch on the satellite controller.
3-35
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Resistor Screen
------ALARMS------
Sensor Type
This is a choice field for Analog types only. A list of available
choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<General, Thermistor, Resistor,
Resistor+, RawCount, Thermistor+>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired Analog Type has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
Resistor is used to measure resistace of a variable potentiometer.
Available inputs are 0 to 9999 ohms,
NOTE:
The associated analog input jumper on the satellite
controller must also be set to “THERM” in order for this
screen to display the proper temperature value.
Pattern for Values Associated With This Input:
Specifies where you would like the decimal point to appear in the
value displayed by the system. Because this is a “choice” field,
a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the
screen:
< x,xxx , xxx.x , xx.xx , x.xxx >
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar>
until the desired data pattern has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
Units of Measure Message #: 16
A number is entered here that references a message on the On/Off
Units Messages Screen. For example, if units-of-measure message
#16 is “Ohms,” entering “16” will cause “Ohms” to be displayed
as the units-of-measure for the analog input.
Controlled by:
Specifies the binary value that selects the ON or OFF alarm limits.
When this value is OFF, the OFF alarm limits are selected; when it
is ON, the ON alarm limits are selected.
Alarm Type:
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
Alarm Message # Low: ___ High: ___
Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for LOW alarms and
the second for any HIGH alarms. These numbers are used by
the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm
Message Screen.
Alternate Limits Selected By:
Specifies the point that initiates the Alternate mode. When this
address is zero (or OFF), the Normal alarm limits are selected;
when it is one (or ON), the Alternate alarm limits are selected.
Limits
On
Off
On (alt)
Off (alt)
Local Set
Low
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
High
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
This group of inputs specifies the alarm limits for the “Normal,”
“Alternate,” and “Local Set” modes. Each mode has a LOW and
HIGH limit. When the value of the analog input goes out of these
limits, an alarm is generated, and the alarm will automatically
display and e-mail out.
Filter Time Constant: ____ Seconds
Specifies the sampling rate of the analog input. This is used by the
satellites to “filter” (or smooth) the analog input signal. This can be
used on inputs that “jump around” to reduce sporadic load control.
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
< 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 >
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired filter time constant has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
3-36
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Resistor Screen
There are two fields on this screen that determine which set of
limits are active—the status of the “Controlled by” field and the
status of the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. When the value
that has been input in the “Controlled by” field is ON, either the
“On” limits or the “On (Alt)” limits are active depending on the
status of the value input in the “Alternate Limits selected by” field.
If the value in the “Alternate” field is On, the “On (Alt)” limits are
used, and when the “Alternate” value is OFF, the “On” limits are
used.
Alternate Limits
Active Alarm
Controlled by:
Selected by:
Limits:
On
Off
On
On
On
On (Alt)
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off (Alt)
The local set alarm limits become active if the MCD quits
communicating with the satellite controller. After communications
are re-established, any alarms that occurred while the satellite was
in local set will be reported.
------ BINARY SETPOINTS -----____Above:____
____Below:____
These inputs are used to convert the analog signal to a binary (On/
Off) signal. The value that is going ON and OFF is a software point
referred to as a comparator. Each analog input has a comparator
associated with it named “Cn.” The comparator for analog input
#1 is “C1,” analog input number 2 is “C2,” and so on. The status of
the comparator can be seen on the Analog Input Summary Screen.
When the
user has
selected:
OFF Above &
OFF Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than the
ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint,
and ON when the Analog Input value is equal to
either one or between the two setpoints.
OFF Above &
ON Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than
or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog
Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint,
and ON when the Analog Input value is less than or
equal to BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input
value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint.
ON Above &
OFF Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is less than or
equal to the BELOW setpoint or until the Analog
Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE
setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is
greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or
until the Analog Input value becomes less than the
BELOW setpoint.
ON Above &
ON Below:
OFF when the Analog input value is equal to either
one or between the two setpoints, and ON when
the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE
setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint.
Limit overlap time after control change:
This specifies the amount of time the WCC software will wait after
a control change (i.e., on/off schedule, alternate mode, local set
mode) before deciding to generate an alarm. The first input is a
user-entered number from 1 to 60, and the second input is either
seconds or minutes. This second input is a “choice” field; the list
of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
The value of the comparator is:
<Seconds, Minutes>
Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<ON, OFF>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired choice is selected and then pressing <Enter>.
On Message #:
Off Message #:
Specifies a pair of message numbers, the first for the ON state and
the second for the OFF state of the comparator. These numbers
are used by the system to reference a message on the ON/OFF
Units Message Screen. For example, the comparator might be set
up to come on when the outside air temperature is below 55 °F for
economizer operation. Set up the On/Off Message Screen so that
message #3 is “ECON” and message #4 is “REFRIG.” The “On
Message” number would be “3” (ECON), and the “OFF Message”
number would be “4” (REFRIG).
WCC III Technical Guide
3-37
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Resistor+ Screen
Analog Input Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXAY, where XXX = Satellite Address, A = Analog Input, and Y = 1-8
ANALOG INPUT RESISTOR+ SCREEN
Satellite # _______
Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently
editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow
keys to move the cursor to this field, type in the desired satellite
number, and press <Enter>.
Additionally, this field specifies the point number to edit. For the
Analog Input Screen, this number can range from one to eight,
corresponding from A1 to A8, respectively. If you would like to
edit a different point, move the cursor to this field by using the
arrow keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>.
Analog Input # ________
Description:
This “field” actually contains two separate fields. The first field
specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog
output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because
this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed
at the bottom of the screen:
A short message is entered here which is displayed on Summary
Screens to help you remember points within the system. You
may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the
double quote character are not allowed).
<ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT,
TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. (If you select
a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the
screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.)
3-38
Type: Analog Resistor+
This field is automatically filled in by the system. On screens 2-8,
this will always read “ANALOG.” On screen number 1, it will
read either “ANALOG” or “PULSE” depending on the position of
the pulse switch on the satellite controller.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Resistor+ Screen
Sensor Type
Resistor to Ohms ratio: _______ / KOhm
This is a choice field for Analog types only. A list of available
choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
This is the calibration for the scaling of the thermistor. There is
a value that is needed for correct thermistor Resistance to Ohms
calculations.
<General, Thermistor, Resistor,
Resistor+, RawCount, Thermistor+>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired Analog Type has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
Resistor+ is used to set up different types of thermistors.
WattMaster thermistors are 10K type 3 curve. You would enter
values on the screen to correspond to different values and type
curves of thermistors. Available inputs are 0 to 9999 ohms,
NOTE:
The associated analog input jumper on the satellite
controller must also be set to “THERM” in order for this
screen to display the proper temperature value.
Pattern for Values Associated With This Input:
Specifies where you would like the decimal point to appear in the
value displayed by the system. Because this is a “choice” field,
a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the
screen:
< x,xxx , xxx.x , xx.xx , x.xxx >
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar>
until the desired data pattern has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
Resistor Bias:
This is the Bias resistor in the satellite. This is currently a 10 K
Ohm resistor and is soldered onto the satellite’s main circuit board.
This Bias resistor can be changed but will need to be specified
when the satellite is ordered from WattMaster Controls.
Unit Offset:
There is an option to change the calibration of a thermistor sensor
(usually due to the position or location of the thermistor sensor) a
few Ohms plus or minus from the actual Ohms that the thermistor
sensor is actually reading. Acceptable values in this field are
numerical with both positive and negative (+/-) values.
WCC III Technical Guide
Units of Measure Message #: 16
A number is entered here that references a message on the On/Off
Units Messages Screen. For example, if units-of-measure message
#16 is “Ohms,” entering “16” will cause “Ohms” to be displayed
as the units-of-measure for the analog input.
Filter Time Constant: ____ Seconds
Specifies the sampling rate of the analog input. This is used by the
satellites to “filter” (or smooth) the analog input signal. This can be
used on inputs that “jump around” to reduce sporadic load control.
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
< 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 >
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired filter time constant has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
------ALARMS-----Controlled by:
Specifies the binary value that selects the ON or OFF alarm limits.
When this value is OFF, the OFF alarm limits are selected; when it
is ON, the ON alarm limits are selected.
Alarm Type:
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
Alarm Message # Low: ___ High: ___
Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for LOW alarms and
the second for any HIGH alarms. These numbers are used by
the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm
Message Screen.
3-39
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Resistor + Screen
Alternate Limits Selected By:
Specifies the point that initiates the Alternate mode. When this
address is zero (or OFF), the Normal alarm limits are selected;
when it is one (or ON), the Alternate alarm limits are selected.
Limits
On
Off
On (alt)
Off (alt)
Local Set
Low
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
High
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
This group of inputs specifies the alarm limits for the “Normal,”
“Alternate,” and “Local Set” modes. Each mode has a LOW and
HIGH limit. When the value of the analog input goes out of these
limits, an alarm is generated, and the alarm will automatically
display and e-mail out.
There are two fields on this screen that determine which set of
limits are active—the status of the “Controlled by” field and the
status of the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. When the value
that has been input in the “Controlled by” field is ON, either the
“On” limits or the “On (Alt)” limits are active depending on the
status of the value input in the “Alternate Limits selected by” field.
If the value in the “Alternate” field is On, the “On (Alt)” limits are
used, and when the “Alternate” value is OFF, the “On” limits are
used.
Alternate Limits
Active Alarm
Controlled by:
Selected by:
Limits:
On
Off
On
On
On
On (Alt)
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off (Alt)
The local set alarm limits become active if the MCD quits
communicating with the satellite controller. After communications
are re-established, any alarms that occurred while the satellite was
in local set will be reported.
Limit overlap time after control change:
This specifies the amount of time the WCC software will wait after
a control change (i.e., on/off schedule, alternate mode, local set
mode) before deciding to generate an alarm. The first input is a
user-entered number from 1 to 60, and the second input is either
seconds or minutes. This second input is a “choice” field; the list
of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Seconds, Minutes>
3-40
------ BINARY SETPOINTS -----____Above:____
____Below:____
These inputs are used to convert the analog signal to a binary (On/
Off) signal. The value that is going ON and OFF is a software point
referred to as a comparator. Each analog input has a comparator
associated with it named “Cn.” The comparator for analog input
#1 is “C1,” analog input number 2 is “C2,” and so on. The status of
the comparator can be seen on the Analog Input Summary Screen.
When the
user has
selected:
The value of the comparator is:
OFF Above &
OFF Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than the
ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint,
and ON when the Analog Input value is equal to
either one or between the two setpoints.
OFF Above &
ON Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than
or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog
Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint,
and ON when the Analog Input value is less than or
equal to BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input
value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint.
ON Above &
OFF Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is less than or
equal to the BELOW setpoint or until the Analog
Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE
setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is
greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or
until the Analog Input value becomes less than the
BELOW setpoint.
ON Above &
ON Below:
OFF when the Analog input value is equal to either
one or between the two setpoints, and ON when
the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE
setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint.
Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<ON, OFF>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired choice is selected and then pressing <Enter>.
On Message #:
Off Message #:
Specifies a pair of message numbers, the first for the ON state and
the second for the OFF state of the comparator. These numbers
are used by the system to reference a message on the ON/OFF
Units Message Screen. For example, the comparator might be set
up to come on when the outside air temperature is below 55 °F for
economizer operation. Set up the On/Off Message Screen so that
message #3 is “ECON” and message #4 is “REFRIG.” The “On
Message” number would be “3” (ECON), and the “OFF Message”
number would be “4” (REFRIG).
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input RawCount Screen
Analog Input Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXAY, where XXX = Satellite Address, A = Analog Input, and Y = 1-8
ANALOG INPUT RAWCOUNT SCREEN
Satellite # _______
Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently
editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow
keys to move the cursor to this field, type in the desired satellite
number, and press <Enter>.
Additionally, this field specifies the point number to edit. For the
Analog Input Screen, this number can range from one to eight,
corresponding from A1 to A8, respectively. If you would like to
edit a different point, move the cursor to this field by using the
arrow keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>.
Analog Input # ________
Description:
This “field” actually contains two separate fields. The first field
specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog
output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because
this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed
at the bottom of the screen:
A short message is entered here which is displayed on Summary
Screens to help you remember points within the system. You
may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the
double quote character are not allowed).
<ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT,
TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. (If you select
a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the
screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.)
WCC III Technical Guide
Type: RawCount
This field is automatically filled in by the system. On screens 2-8,
this will always read “ANALOG.” On screen number 1, it will
read either “ANALOG” or “PULSE” depending on the position
of the pulse switch on the satellite controller.
3-41
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input RawCount Screen
------ALARMS------
Sensor Type
This is a choice field for Analog types only. A list of available
choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<General, Thermistor, Resistor,
Resistor+, RawCount, Thermistor+>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired Analog Type has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
RawCount is the raw count value straight from the 12 bit A to D
converter. Used for testing and or calibrating to see if the analog
signal is linear, so that you may test the non-linear curve of any
sensor to determine if any offset is needed.
Units of Measure Message #: 1
A number is entered here that references a message on the On/Off
Units Messages Screen. For example, if units-of-measure message
#1 is “Data,” entering “1” will cause “Data” to be displayed as the
units-of-measure for the analog input.
Controlled by:
Specifies the binary value that selects the ON or OFF alarm limits.
When this value is OFF, the OFF alarm limits are selected; when it
is ON, the ON alarm limits are selected.
Alarm Type:
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
Alarm Message # Low: ___ High: ___
Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for LOW alarms and
the second for any HIGH alarms. These numbers are used by
the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm
Message Screen.
Alternate Limits Selected By:
Filter Time Constant: ____ Seconds
Specifies the sampling rate of the analog input. This is used by the
satellites to “filter” (or smooth) the analog input signal. This can be
used on inputs that “jump around” to reduce sporadic load control.
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
< 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 >
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired filter time constant has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
3-42
Specifies the point that initiates the Alternate mode. When this
address is zero (or OFF), the Normal alarm limits are selected;
when it is one (or ON), the Alternate alarm limits are selected.
Limits
On
Off
On (alt)
Off (alt)
Local Set
Low
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
High
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
This group of inputs specifies the alarm limits for the “Normal,”
“Alternate,” and “Local Set” modes. Each mode has a LOW and
HIGH limit. When the value of the analog input goes out of these
limits, an alarm is generated, and the alarm will automatically
display and e-mail out.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input RawCount Screen
There are two fields on this screen that determine which set of
limits are active—the status of the “Controlled by” field and the
status of the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. When the value
that has been input in the “Controlled by” field is ON, either the
“On” limits or the “On (Alt)” limits are active depending on the
status of the value input in the “Alternate Limits selected by” field.
If the value in the “Alternate” field is On, the “On (Alt)” limits are
used, and when the “Alternate” value is OFF, the “On” limits are
used.
Alternate Limits
Active Alarm
Controlled by:
Selected by:
Limits:
On
Off
On
On
On
On (Alt)
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off (Alt)
The local set alarm limits become active if the MCD quits
communicating with the satellite controller. After communications
are re-established, any alarms that occurred while the satellite was
in local set will be reported.
------ BINARY SETPOINTS -----____Above:____
____Below:____
These inputs are used to convert the analog signal to a binary (On/
Off) signal. The value that is going ON and OFF is a software point
referred to as a comparator. Each analog input has a comparator
associated with it named “Cn.” The comparator for analog input
#1 is “C1,” analog input number 2 is “C2,” and so on. The status of
the comparator can be seen on the Analog Input Summary Screen.
When the
user has
selected:
OFF Above &
OFF Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than the
ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint,
and ON when the Analog Input value is equal to
either one or between the two setpoints.
OFF Above &
ON Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than
or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog
Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint,
and ON when the Analog Input value is less than or
equal to BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input
value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint.
ON Above &
OFF Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is less than or
equal to the BELOW setpoint or until the Analog
Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE
setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is
greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or
until the Analog Input value becomes less than the
BELOW setpoint.
ON Above &
ON Below:
OFF when the Analog input value is equal to either
one or between the two setpoints, and ON when
the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE
setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint.
Limit overlap time after control change:
This specifies the amount of time the WCC software will wait after
a control change (i.e., on/off schedule, alternate mode, local set
mode) before deciding to generate an alarm. The first input is a
user-entered number from 1 to 60, and the second input is either
seconds or minutes. This second input is a “choice” field; the list
of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
The value of the comparator is:
<Seconds, Minutes>
Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<ON, OFF>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired choice is selected and then pressing <Enter>.
On Message #:
Off Message #:
Specifies a pair of message numbers, the first for the ON state and
the second for the OFF state of the comparator. These numbers
are used by the system to reference a message on the ON/OFF
Units Message Screen. For example, the comparator might be set
up to come on when the outside air temperature is below 55 °F for
economizer operation. Set up the On/Off Message Screen so that
message #3 is “ECON” and message #4 is “REFRIG.” The “On
Message” number would be “3” (ECON), and the “OFF Message”
number would be “4” (REFRIG).
WCC III Technical Guide
3-43
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Thermistor+ Screen
Analog Input Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXAY, where XXX = Satellite Address, A = Analog Input, and Y = 1-8
ANALOG INPUT THERMISTOR+ SCREEN
Satellite #
1
ANALOG INPUT #
2
Description: Room
Type: Analog
Thermistor+
Pattern for values associated with this input: xxx.x
Degree Type: ºF
Units of Measure message #: 1
Offset:
0.0 Deg F
Filter time constant: 0 seconds
b0: 0.0014062
b1: 0.00023671
b3: 0.0000001023
Controlled by:
0
Alarm Type: 1
Alarm Message #’s:
__________________ ALARMS _____________________
Limits
Low
On
40.0
Low
1
High
2
Off
40.0
Alternate limits selected by:
0
Limit overlap time
after control change: 0 Seconds
High
60.0
60.0
Deg F
Deg F
On (alt)
Off (alt)
40.0
40.0
60.0
60.0
Deg F
Deg F
Local set
40.0
60.0
Deg F
================= BINARY SETPOINT ===================
OFF Above
8.0 Deg F
On Message #: 5 Flow
OFF Below
5.0 Deg F
Off Message #: 6 No Flow
HOME for menu
Satellite # _______
Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently
editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow
keys to move the cursor to this field, type in the desired satellite
number, and press <Enter>.
Additionally, this field specifies the point number to edit. For the
Analog Input Screen, this number can range from one to eight,
corresponding from A1 to A8, respectively. If you would like to
edit a different point, move the cursor to this field by using the
arrow keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>.
Analog Input # ________
Description:
This “field” actually contains two separate fields. The first field
specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog
output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because
this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed
at the bottom of the screen:
A short message is entered here which is displayed on Summary
Screens to help you remember points within the system. You
may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the
double quote character are not allowed).
<ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT,
TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. (If you select
a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the
screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.)
3-44
Type: Analog Thermistor+
This field is automatically filled in by the system. On screens 2-8,
this will always read “ANALOG.” On screen number 1, it will
read either “ANALOG” or “PULSE” depending on the position
of the pulse switch on the satellite controller.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Thermistor+ Screen
Sensor Type
Offset:
This is a choice field for Analog types only. A list of available
choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
There is an option to change the calibration of a thermistor sensor
(Usually due to the position or location of the thermistor sensor)
a few degrees plus or minus from the actual temperature that the
thermistor sensor is actually reading. Acceptable values in this
field are numerical with both positive and negative (+/-) values.
<General, Thermistor, Resistor,
Resistor+, RawCount, Thermistor+>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired Analog Type has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
Thermistor+ is to be used if you are using a thermistor type sensor
that WattMaster Controls has not provided. Other thermistor type
sensors can be connected to the Satellite controller’s analog inputs
with this screen. Please consult the WattMaster Controls factory
for all other thermistor type sensors that you wish to connect to the
Satellite Controller. WattMaster Controls can provide the correct
b0, b1, b3 values at our option.
NOTE:
The associated analog input jumper on the satellite
controller must also be set to “THERM” in order for this
screen to display the proper temperature value.
Pattern for Values Associated With This Input:
Units of Measure Message #: 1
A number is entered here that references a message on the On/Off
Units Messages Screen. For example, if units-of-measure message
#1 is “Deg F,” entering “1” will cause “Deg F” to be displayed as
the units-of-measure for the analog input.
Filter Time Constant: ____ Seconds
Specifies the sampling rate of the analog input. This is used by the
satellites to “filter” (or smooth) the analog input signal. This can be
used on inputs that “jump around” to reduce sporadic load control.
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
< 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 >
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired filter time constant has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
Specifies where you would like the decimal point to appear in the
value displayed by the system. Because this is a “choice” field,
a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the
screen:
< x,xxx , xxx.x , xx.xx , x.xxx >
------ALARMS-----Controlled by:
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar>
until the desired data pattern has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
Specifies the binary value that selects the ON or OFF alarm limits.
When this value is OFF, the OFF alarm limits are selected; when it
is ON, the ON alarm limits are selected.
Degree Type:
Alarm Type:
Specifies how you would like the temperature displayed, in
Fahrenheit or Celsius. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
< ºF, ºC >
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar>
until the desired data pattern has been selected and then pressing
<Enter>.
WCC III Technical Guide
Alarm Message # Low: ___ High: ___
Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for LOW alarms and
the second for any HIGH alarms. These numbers are used by
the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm
Message Screen.
3-45
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Thermistor+ Screen
Alternate Limits Selected By:
------ BINARY SETPOINTS ------
Specifies the point that initiates the Alternate mode. When this
address is zero (or OFF), the Normal alarm limits are selected;
when it is one (or ON), the Alternate alarm limits are selected.
____Above:____
____Below:____
Limits
On
Off
On (alt)
Off (alt)
Local Set
These inputs are used to convert the analog signal to a binary (On/
Off) signal. The value that is going ON and OFF is a software point
referred to as a comparator. Each analog input has a comparator
associated with it named “Cn.” The comparator for analog input
#1 is “C1,” analog input number 2 is “C2,” and so on. The status of
the comparator can be seen on the Analog Input Summary Screen.
Low
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
High
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
_____ °. F
This group of inputs specifies the alarm limits for the “Normal,”
“Alternate,” and “Local Set” modes. Each mode has a LOW and
HIGH limit. When the value of the analog input goes out of these
limits, an alarm is generated, and the alarm will automatically
display and e-mail out.
There are two fields on this screen that determine which set of
limits are active—the status of the “Controlled by” field and the
status of the “Alternate Limits selected by” field. When the value
that has been input in the “Controlled by” field is ON, either the
“On” limits or the “On (Alt)” limits are active depending on the
status of the value input in the “Alternate Limits selected by” field.
If the value in the “Alternate” field is On, the “On (Alt)” limits are
used, and when the “Alternate” value is OFF, the “On” limits are
used.
Alternate Limits
Active Alarm
Controlled by:
Selected by:
Limits:
On
Off
On
On
On
On (Alt)
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off (Alt)
The local set alarm limits become active if the MCD quits
communicating with the satellite controller. After communications
are re-established, any alarms that occurred while the satellite was
in local set will be reported.
Limit overlap time after control change:
This specifies the amount of time the WCC software will wait after
a control change (i.e., on/off schedule, alternate mode, local set
mode) before deciding to generate an alarm. The first input is a
user-entered number from 1 to 60, and the second input is either
seconds or minutes. This second input is a “choice” field; the list
of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Seconds, Minutes>
3-46
When the
user has
selected:
The value of the comparator is:
OFF Above &
OFF Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than the
ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint,
and ON when the Analog Input value is equal to
either one or between the two setpoints.
OFF Above &
ON Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than
or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog
Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint,
and ON when the Analog Input value is less than or
equal to BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input
value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint.
ON Above &
OFF Below:
OFF when the Analog Input value is less than or
equal to the BELOW setpoint or until the Analog
Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE
setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is
greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or
until the Analog Input value becomes less than the
BELOW setpoint.
ON Above &
ON Below:
OFF when the Analog input value is equal to either
one or between the two setpoints, and ON when
the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE
setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint.
Because this is a “choice” field, a list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<ON, OFF>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired choice is selected and then pressing <Enter>.
On Message #:
Off Message #:
Specifies a pair of message numbers, the first for the ON state and
the second for the OFF state of the comparator. These numbers
are used by the system to reference a message on the ON/OFF
Units Message Screen. For example, the comparator might be set
up to come on when the outside air temperature is below 55 °F for
economizer operation. Set up the On/Off Message Screen so that
message #3 is “ECON” and message #4 is “REFRIG.” The “On
Message” number would be “3” (ECON), and the “OFF Message”
number would be “4” (REFRIG).
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Thermistor+ Screen
Thermistor+ Screen
The Thermistor+ Screen is to be used if you are using a thermistor
type sensor that WattMaster Controls has not provided. The
example provided here is for a BAPI™ compatible Alerton™
standard 3K @ 77 Deg F Thermistor Sensor. Other thermistor
type sensors can be connected to the Satellite controller’s analog
inputs with this screen. Please consult the WattMaster Controls
factory for all other thermistor type sensors that you wish to
connect to the Satellite Controller. WattMaster Controls can
provide the correct b0, b1, b3 values at our option. Also note that
the associated analog input jumper on the Satellite controller must
also be set to “THERM” in order for this screen to display the
proper temperature value.
A thermistor is a type of resistor whose resistance varies with
temperature. Thermistor sensors differ from resistance temperature
detectors (RTD) in that the material used in a thermistor sensor is
generally a ceramic or polymer type of material, while RTD type
sensors use pure metals.
Advantages of Using a Thermistor
Sensor
The typical interchangeability tolerance (Inherent Accuracy) for
any thermistor sensors are: ± 0.2 °C (0 to 70 °C)
Disadvantages of Using a Thermistor
Sensor
The only real disadvantage to using a thermistor type sensor is
that there are many different resistance types and corresponding
different temperature curves for different manufacturers of
thermistor temperature sensors. The temperature curve of a
thermistor is non-linear in nature.
To correctly calculate the temperature curve of a thermistor,
WattMaster Controls uses a formula based on the industry standard
Steinhart-Hart Equation. These formulas and resultant calculations
reside within the Satellite controller as the Satellite controller’s
CPU actually performs these resistance to temperature calculations
many times per second.
The Steinhart-Hart Equation
The three-term Steinhart-Hart equation (Equation 1) is the
most popular equation that is used for thermistor resistance to
temperature calculations. There are three coefficients values that
are needed for correct thermistor Resistance to Temperature sensor
calculations: b0, b1, and b3.
These three coefficients values should be provided by the thermistor
manufacturer for each possible type of thermistor sensor that is
used, but WattMaster Controls can also provide the correct b0, b1,
b3 values at our option.
Thermistor Stability (Drift)
1
Thermistor stability (drift) is the amount that the resistance
characteristics of a thermistor will change. WattMaster Controls
uses only the highest quality, “pre-aged” thermistor with very small
drift values. Over a ten-year span, WattMaster Controls thermistor
products will not change (drift) more than 0.1°C.
T
Operating ranges:
= A + Bln (R) + C(ln(R))3
Where T is the temperature in Kelvins, R is the resistance at T in
ohms, and A, B, and C are the Steinhart-Hart coefficients which
vary depending on the type and model of thermistor and the
temperature range of interest. The temperature in Kelvins is then
converted to Fahrenheit or Celsius within the satellite controller.
Typical maximum operating ranges for thermistor type sensors are
-55 to 150 °C (-67 to 302 °F)
WCC III Technical Guide
3-47
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Thermistor+ Screen
Here are the three coefficients values for WattMaster Controls
standard 10K @ 77 Deg F type 4 Thermistor Sensor.
b0 =
0.001028340 (calculated as 0.0010283404
and rounded off to 0.001028340)
b1 =
0.000239398 (calculated as 0.00023939782
and rounded off to 0.000239398)
b3 =
0.0000001567 (calculated as 0.00000015669566
and rounded off to 0.0000001567)
Here are the three coefficients values for the BAPI™ compatible
Alerton™ standard 3K @ 77 Deg F Thermistor Sensor.
Temperature / Resistance / Voltage Chart
for the BAPI™ (Alerton™) Standard
3K @ 77 Deg F Thermistor Sensor
Temp
(ºF)
Temp
(ºC)
Resistance
(Ohms)
Voltage @
Input (VDC)
-39
-39.44
96,941
4.526
-37
-38.33
90,108
4.494
-35
-37.22
83,804
4.461
-33
-36.11
77,983
4.426
-31
-35.00
72,607
4.387
-29
-33.89
67,637
4.350
0.0014062 (calculated as 0.00140628
and rounded off to 0.0014062)
-27
-32.78
63,041
4.308
-25
-31.67
58,789
4.267
b1 =
0.000236714 (calculated as 0.000236714
and rounded off to 0.00023671)
-23
-30.56
54,851
4.222
-21
-29.44
51,173
4.176
b3 =
0.0000001023 (calculated as 0.000000102331
and rounded off to 0.0000001023)
-19
-28.33
47,795
4.128
-17
-27.22
44,663
4.078
BAPI™ and Alerton™ are the trademarks of their respective
companies.
-15
-26.11
41,756
4.028
-13
-25.00
39,059
3.975
-11
-23.89
36,553
3.921
-9
-22.78
34,225
3.864
-7
-21.67
32,061
3.806
-5
-20.56
30,067
3.748
-3
-19.44
28,157
3.684
-1
-18.33
26,414
3.622
1
-17.22
24,790
3.557
3
-16.11
23,277
3.493
5
-15.00
21,865
3.427
7
-13.89
20,549
3.360
9
-12.78
19,320
3.293
11
-11.67
18,173
3.223
13
-10.56
17,101
3.154
15
-9.44
16,091
3.082
17
-8.33
15,155
3.012
19
-7.22
14,280
2.940
b0 =
3-48
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Thermistor+ Screen
Temp
(ºF)
Temp
(ºC)
Resistance
(Ohms)
Voltage @
Input (VDC)
Temp
(ºF)
Temp
(ºC)
Resistance
(Ohms)
Voltage @
Input (VDC)
21
-6.11
13,461
2.869
105
40.56
1,562
0.677
23
-5.00
12,694
2.797
107
41.67
1,494
0.652
25
-3.89
11,975
2.727
109
42.78
1,430
0.627
27
-2.78
11,302
2.655
111
43.89
1,368
0.603
29
-1.67
10,671
2.583
113
45.00
1,310
0.581
31
-0.56
10,079
2.512
115
46.11
1,255
0.559
33
0.56
9,519
2.135
117
47.22
1,202
0.538
35
1.67
8,999
2.365
119
48.33
1,151
0.518
37
2.78
8,510
2.296
121
49.44
1,104
0.499
39
3.89
8,050
2.227
123
50.56
1,058
0.480
41
5.00
7,619
2.160
125
51.67
1,104
0.482
43
6.11
7,213
2.093
127
52.78
973
0.444
45
7.22
6,831
2.027
129
53.89
933
0.427
47
8.33
6,472
1.962
131
55.00
895
0.411
49
9.44
6,134
1.898
133
56.11
860
0.397
51
10.56
5,813
1.837
135
57.22
825
0.382
53
11.67
5,513
1.775
137
58.33
793
0.368
55
12.78
5,231
1.716
139
59.44
761
0.354
57
13.89
4,965
1.657
141
60.56
731
0.341
59
15.00
4,714
1.600
143
61.67
703
0.329
61
16.11
4,478
1.544
145
62.78
676
0.317
63
17.22
4,254
1.490
147
63.89
650
0.306
65
18.33
4,043
1.437
149
65.00
625
0.295
67
19.44
3,844
1.388
151
66.11
601
0.284
69
20.56
3,655
1.338
153
67.22
578
0.274
71
21.67
3,477
1.289
155
68.33
556
0.264
73
22.78
3,309
1.243
157
69.44
536
0.255
75
23.89
3,150
1.197
159
70.56
516
0.246
77
25.00
3,000
1.153
161
71.67
496
0.237
79
26.11
2,858
1.110
163
72.78
478
0.229
81
27.22
2,723
1.069
165
73.89
461
0.221
83
28.33
2,596
1.029
167
75.00
444
0.213
85
29.44
2,475
0.991
169
76.11
428
0.206
87
30.56
2,360
0.953
171
77.22
413
0.199
89
31.67
2,252
0.918
173
78.33
398
0.192
91
32.78
2,149
0.883
175
79.44
384
0.186
93
33.89
2,051
0.849
177
80.56
370
0.179
95
35.00
1,959
0.821
179
81.67
357
0.173
97
36.11
1,871
0.790
181
82.78
345
0.167
99
37.22
1,788
0.760
183
83.89
333
0.162
101
38.33
1,709
0.731
185
85.00
321
0.156
103
39.44
1,634
0.704
187
86.11
310
0.151
WCC III Technical Guide
3-49
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Input Thermistor+ Screen
Temperature Sensor Testing
The following sensor voltage and resistance tables are provided
to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly.
Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor
wiring. Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in
this manual.
If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading
correctly, check voltage and/or resistance to confirm that the sensor
is operating correctly per the tables. Please follow the notes and
instructions below each chart when checking sensors.
Temperature – Resistance – Voltage for
Type III 10 K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
3-50
Temp
(ºF)
Resistance
(Ohms)
Voltage @
Input (VDC)
-10
93333
4.620
-5
80531
4.550
0
69822
4.474
5
60552
4.390
10
52500
4.297
15
45902
4.200
20
40147
4.095
25
35165
3.982
30
30805
3.862
35
27140
3.737
40
23874
3.605
45
21094
3.470
50
18655
3.330
52
17799
3.275
54
16956
3.217
56
16164
3.160
58
15385
3.100
60
14681
3.042
62
14014
2.985
64
13382
2.927
66
12758
2.867
68
12191
2.810
69
11906
2.780
70
11652
2.752
71
11379
2.722
72
11136
2.695
73
10878
2.665
Temperature – Resistance – Voltage for
Type III 10 K Ohm Thermistor Sensors
Temp
(ºF)
Resistance
(Ohms)
Voltage @
Input (VDC)
74
10625
2.635
75
10398
2.607
76
10158
2.577
78
9711
2.520
80
9302
2.465
82
8893
2.407
84
8514
2.352
86
8153
2.297
88
7805
2.242
90
7472
2.187
95
6716
2.055
100
6047
1.927
105
5453
1.805
110
4923
1.687
115
4449
1.575
120
4030
1.469
125
3656
1.369
130
3317
1.274
135
3015
1.185
140
2743
1.101
145
2502
1.024
150
2288
0.952
Thermistor Sensor Testing Instructions
Use the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while
disconnected from the controllers (not powered).
Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to
powered controllers. Read voltage with meter set on DC volts.
Place the “-” (minus) lead on GND terminal and the “+” (plus) lead
on the sensor input terminal being investigated.
If the voltage is above 5.08 VDC, then the sensor or wiring is
“open.” If the voltage is less than 0.05 VDC, then the sensor or
wiring is shorted.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Control Output Screens
CONTROL OUTPUT SCREENS
The Control Output Screens are used to “tell” the satellite controller
when to open or close the binary output contacts. A binary output
contact may be “programmed” using one of the following screens:
1) EA Driver
2) Dual Limit
3) Time Clock
EA Driver Screen
The EA Driver Screen is generally used to control the electric
actuators on a variable air volume (VAV) box; however, it can be
used for other applications. The EA Driver Screen uses two binary
outputs on the satellite controller—the “COM to H” contact closes
on a call for heating, and the “COM to C” contact closes on a call
for cooling. The generic term for the method of control provided
by the EA Driver Screen is “3 point floating control.” When the
analog input signal is within the deadband, both contacts open and
the actuator does not move. When the analog input signal falls
below the setpoint into the pulse band, the “COM to H” output
WCC III Technical Guide
contact pulses at a preset rate to slowly move the actuator toward
the required position. If the analog input signal falls below the
pulse band, the “COM to H” contact closes and the actuator drives
full speed. When the analog input signal rises above the setpoint,
the same sequence occurs with the “COM to C” contact.
Dual Limit Screen
The Dual Limit Screen is used to “program” one binary output on
the satellite controller to open and close based on how the value
of an analog input compares to the setpoints. It is called dual limit
because you have the option of entering two setpoints if required.
For example, if you are using the SAT III to control a heat pump
compressor, the binary output should close if the space temperature
is below 72 °F for heating, close if the space temperature is above
76 °F for cooling, and be open when the space temperature is
between 72 °F and 76 °F.
Time Clock Screen
The Time Clock Screen is used to open and close a binary output
based on time only. For example, if you want the SAT III to run a
pump from 8:00 am to 6:00 pm, Monday through Friday, a Time
Clock Screen would be used to “program” the binary output for
the pump.
3-51
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Control Output Summary Screen
Control Output Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXKYh or c, where XXX = Satellite Address #, K = Control Output,
Y = Control Output #, h = Heat (General Purpose), and c = Cool (General Purpose)
CONTROL OUTPUT SUMMARY SCREEN
Control Output
COMMENTS
Klh:
c:
K2h
c:
S1-K1h
S1-K1c
S1-K2h
S1-K2c
K3h:
c:
K4h:
c:
K5h:
c:
K6h:
c:
K7h:
c:
K8h:
c:
S1-K3h
S1-K3c
S1-K4h
S1-K4c
S1-K5h
S1-K5c
S1-K6h
S1-K6c
S1-K7h
S1-K7c
S1-K8h
S1-K8c
STATUS
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Satellite # __1 Satellite # __1
Control Outputs
SCHED
STATUS
+
+
-
1
1
1L1
////
-
////
////
////
////
////
////
0
0
////
////
////
////
MODE
ANALOG
CONTROL INPUT
76.2 DEG.
74.7 DEG.
Time
08:32
Date
1/20
CONTROL
LOW
LIMIT
HIGH
74.0
set =
200.0
74.0
HOME for menu
Control Out
Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a
“choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the
bottom of the screen:
To view or edit a specific control output, use the arrow keys to
position the cursor (shown as “>” along the left hand side of the
screen) to the desired point and press <Enter>. The Control Output
Screen for the specific point will now appear.
<Analog Input, Control Output, Analog Output,
Trend Logging, Logic Switch, Binary Output>
Time / Date
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired summary type appears and then pressing <Enter>.
If you select a summary type that is different than that currently
being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the new screen
information.
Satellite ______
The present time and date will automatically appear at these
locations.
COMMENTS
The description message which was entered on the control output
screen is displayed here to help you identify the different control
outputs within the system.
Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently
communicating with. If you would like to view the control output
summary data for a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move
the cursor to this field, enter the desired satellite number, and press
<Enter>.
3-52
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Control Output Summary Screen
STATUS
altl:
A message is displayed here to help you monitor the status of the
equipment being controlled. For items being controlled by the time
clock or dual limit modes, the on/off messages which were input
on the respective control output screens will automatically appear
here. For the EA driver mode you will see one of the following
symbols or messages:
This message is to inform you that a control output using
the time clock mode is in the primary alternate mode. When
the status (“ON” or “OFF” state) of the [binary] input
value which has been entered on the Control Output Screen
to select the primary alternate mode is “ON,” the “altl”
message will be displayed here.
alt2:
This message is to inform you that a control output using
the time clock mode is in the secondary alternate mode.
When the status (“ON” or “OFF” state) of the [binary] input
value which has been entered on the Control Output Screen
to select the secondary alternate mode is “ON,” the “alt2”
message will be displayed here.
loc:
This message is to inform you that the control outputs are
in the local set mode. This message will appear if the small
toggle switch on the front of the satellite controller labeled
“local set” is in the on position. This message will also
appear when the satellite is going through a power up delay.
The power up delay allows the WCC III system to soft-start
the equipment after a power failure. When power is restored
to a satellite, the output contacts will remain open for an
adjustable amount of time. The delay time is entered for
each satellite controller on the satellite summary screen.
idle:
When this message appears, the value of the analog input
associated with the control output is within the setpoint
deadband. In the idle mode, both the “h” and “c” contacts
are open and the controlled device remains in its present
position.
->C
When this symbol appears, the value of the analog input
associated with the control output is above the deadband
but within the pulse band. The “c” contact is pulsing at the
programmed time intervals.
-->C
When this symbol appears, the value of the analog input
associated with the control output is above the pulse band.
The “c” contact is closed, and the controlled device is
moving full speed toward the cooling position.
->H
When this symbol appears, the value of the analog input
associated with the control output is below the deadband
but within the pulse band. The “h” contact is pulsing at the
programmed time intervals.
-->H
When this symbol appears, the value of the analog input
associated with the control output is below the pulse band.
The “h” contact is closed, and the controlled device is
moving full speed toward the heating position.
Schedule Status
CAUTION: Note that the contact outputs in the satellite
controller will remain open during the power up delay time.
This should be taken into consideration when you are deciding
whether an open contact in the satellite should cause the
equipment to be ON or OFF.
revr:
This message appears when the control output is in the
reverse acting mode (EA Driver Screen only.)
ovr:
When using the Dual Limit Screen, this message will appear
when the output has been overridden from the Override
Screen.
The binary input which is controlling the schedule of the control
output is shown here along with a plus (+) or minus (-) sign.
The plus and minus signs indicate the present status (“ON” or
“OFF” state) of the input value which is controlling the schedule.
For example, if week schedule W1 has been input to control the
schedule on an EA Driver Screen, the message “+ W1” will appear
here when week schedule #1 is “ON,” and “- W1” will appear
when week schedule #1 is “OFF.”
The value of the analog input associated with the EA Driver and
Dual Limit Screens will automatically be displayed here.
Mode
The setpoints entered on the EA Driver and Dual Limit Screens
will automatically be displayed here.
Analog Control Input
CONTROL LIMIT
LOW
HIGH
One of the following messages may be displayed here:
alt:
This message is to inform you that the setpoints for the EA
Driver or Dual Limit Screens are in the alternate mode. When
the status (“ON” or “OFF” state) of the [binary] input value
which has been entered on the Control Output Screen to
select the alternate setpoints is “ON,” the “alt” message will
be displayed here.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-53
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Control Output EA Driver Screen
Control Output Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXKYh or c, where XXX = Satellite Address #, K = Control Output,
Y = Control Output #, h = Heat (General Purpose), and c = Cool (General Purpose)
EA DRIVER SCREEN
Satellite #:_____
Satellite #
1
CONTROL OUTPUT
Description: S1-K2h
Analog Control by: ////
Schedule Control by: L1
2
Mode:
EA Driver
COM to H on decreasing control signal
COM to C on increasing control signal
Setpoints
On Schedule:
Off Schedule:
Local Set:
Dead
Pulse
“
“
0 DEG.
1 DEG.
0 DEG.
Alternate On:
Off:
Selected by:
Band width: +/- 0 DEG.
Band width: +/- 0 DEG.
“ Off Time: 0 Minutes
“ On Time: 3 Minutes
Reverse Action Selc’d When
0 Deg F.
0 Deg F
////
//// is OFF
ACTION DIAGRAM
<
ON
COM-H
>
PULSED
<
ALL
OFF
>
<
COM-C
PULSED
>
ON
Setpoint
Dead Band
Pulse Band width
HOME for menu
Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If
you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow keys to
move the cursor to this field, enter the desired satellite number, and
press <Enter>. 1 to 240.
Control Output _____
This “field” actually contains two separate fields. The first field
specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog
output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because
this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed
at the bottom of the screen:
<ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT,
TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired point type has been selected. If you select a point type
that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will
be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.
The second field specifies the point number to edit. For the Control
Output Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you
would like to edit a different point, use the arrow keys to move
the cursor to this field, enter the desired point number, and press
<Enter>.
Mode: __________
Specifies the mode type of the output contact. Because this is a
“choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the
bottom of the screen:
<Undefined, EA Driver, Time Clock, Dual Limit>
3-54
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Control Output EA Driver Screen
You make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the
desired point type appears and then pressing <Enter>. If you select
a mode type that is different than that currently being displayed, the
screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen information.
Schedule
Control by:
On
On
Off
Off
Description: ____________
A short message entered here will appear on summary screens to
help you remember points within the system. You may enter up
to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote
character are not allowed).
Analog Control by:
Specifies the analog point address that acts as the input signal
source for this control output. Analog points within the satellite are
named A1-A8. Global analog values are GA1-GA256. (See Table
of Point Addresses in the General Instructions section on page 1-8
for more information.)
Schedule Control by: ____________
Specifies the binary (On/Off) point address used to schedule
this control output. When this address is zero (or OFF), the OFF
schedule mode is selected; when it is one (or ON), the ON schedule
mode is selected.
COM to H on decreasing control signal
COM to C on increasing control signal
Displayed by the system as a reminder of the function of the output
contacts in the EA Driver mode. The EA Driver mode uses two of
the SAT III binary output contacts. The COM to H contact closes
when the value of the analog input is less than the setpoint. The
COM to C contact closes when the value of the analog input is
greater than the setpoint.
----------- Setpoints ---------On Schedule: ______
Alternate On: ______
Off Schedule: ______
Off: ______
Local Set: _______
Selected by: ______
Specifies a set of analog setpoints (5 total) for the ON and OFF
normal mode schedule, ON and OFF alternate mode schedule, and
Local Set.
The value of the input in the Schedule Control by field and the
Alternate Limits Selected by field determine which setpoint will
be used as shown as follows:
Alternate Limits
Selected by:
Off
On
Off
On
Setpoint:
On Schedule
Alternate On
Off Schedule
Alternate Off
Dead Band Width (+/-): _______
Pulse Band Width (+/-):_______
Specifies the width (plus or minus the setpoint) of the Dead and
Pulse bands. When the system is within the Pulse band, the EA
driver is pulsed, using the timing given below. When the system is
within the Dead band, both contacts open and the controlled device
will remain in its present position.
“
“
“
“
Off Time: ____ Seconds or Minutes
On Time: ____ Seconds or Minutes
Specifies the length of time for the ON and OFF states of the
contact in the Pulse mode. The range is 0 to 60 seconds or minutes,
depending on the unit of time selected. These inputs also act as a
minimum On/Off time for the COM to H and COM to C contacts.
That is, if 10 seconds is entered as the Pulse ON and Pulse OFF
times, once either contact opens it will remain open for a minimum
of 10 seconds, and once a contact closes it will remain closed for a
minimum of 10 seconds.
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
< Seconds, Minutes >
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once
for each choice, and when the desired unit of time appears, press
<Enter>.
Reverse Action Selected When _______is _______
Specifies the binary point address along with the value that the point
address must have to select reverse action mode. When the reverse
action mode is enabled, the opposite contact closes. Normally, the
COM to C contact closes when the value of the analog input is
above the setpoint, but while the reverse action mode is in effect,
the COM to H contact closes and vice versa.
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<OFF, ON>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once
for each choice, and when the desired state has been selected, press
<Enter>.:
WCC III Technical Guide
3-55
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Control Output Dual Limit Screen
Control Output Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXKYh or c, where XXX = Satellite Address #, K = Control Output,
Y = Control Output #, h = Heat (General Purpose), and c = Cool (General Purpose)
DUAL LIMIT SCREEN
Satellite #
1
CONTROL OUTPUT
1
Mode: Dual Limit
“H” Contact
Description: S1-K1h
Analog Control by: ////
Schedule Control by: 1
Alternate Mode selected by: ////
Override OPEN when 0B2 is OFF
Local Set:
On Schedule:
Off Schedule:
On Schedule: (alt)
Off Schedule:(alt)
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
Contact Open Message
Contact Closed
Minimum Off Time: 0
Minimum On Time: 0
Hysteresis: +/- 0
Between
Between
Between
Between
Between
Low Limit
0
0
0
0
0
&
&
&
&
&
#: 2 Off
Message #:
Seconds
Seconds
x 1 DEG.
1 On
Hi Limit
0 DEG.
0 DEG.
0 DEG.
0 DEG.
0 DEG.
Data Register is measured from Midpoint and Reflects Hysteresis
HOME for menu
Satellite #: _____
Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If
you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow keys to
move the cursor to this field, enter the desired satellite number,
and press <Enter>.
Control Output _____
This field actually contains two separate fields. The first field
specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog
output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because
this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed
at the bottom of the screen:
<ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT,
TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once
for each choice, until the desired point type has been selected. (If
you select a point type that is different than that currently being
displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen
and data.) The second field specifies the point number to edit. For
the Control Output Screen, this number can range from one to
eight. If you would like to edit a different point, simply position
3-56
the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys,
enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>.
Mode: ____________
Specifies the mode type of the output contact. Because this is a
“choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the
bottom of the screen:
<Undefined, EA Driver, Time Clock, Dual Limit>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once
for each choice, until the desired point type has been selected, and
then pressing <Enter>. (If you select a mode type that is different
than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten
with the appropriate screen information.)
_______ Contact
Specifies which of the two available contacts per point (H or C)
to configure. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available
choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<H,C>
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Control Output Dual Limit Screen
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once
for each choice until the desired point type has been selected and
then pressing <Enter>.
Note that the H and C contact designations do not mean that they
must be used to control heating or cooling loads respectively. They
are independent contacts.
Description: ______________
is _____
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<OFF, ON>
To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired override state has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
A short message is entered here which is displayed on Summary
and Data Entry/Editing Screens to help you to remember points
within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control
codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed).
The override is enabled when this statement is true. For example, if
you enter “Override Open When GB1 is ON,” the satellite contact
will be forced open when global binary #1 goes ON.
Analog Control by: _______________
Contact Open Message #: ____
Contact Closed Message #: ____
Specifies the analog point address that acts as the input signal
source for this control output.
Schedule Control by: _________________
Specifies the binary point address used to schedule this control
output. When this address is OFF, the OFF schedule setpoints are
used; when it is ON, the ON schedule setpoints are used.
Alternate Mode Selected by: _________________
Specifies the binary point address that initiates the Alternate mode.
When this address is zero (or OFF), the Normal mode is selected;
when it is one (or ON), the Alternate mode is selected.
Override __________ when _________ is __________
This field is used to override the satellite contact either open or
closed based on a binary value going ON or OFF. This has priority
over everything except the minimum on and off times.
Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for the contact open state
and the second for the contact closed state. These numbers refer to
a message on the On/Off Message Screen. For example, message
#1 might be “Fan On” and message #2 “Fan Off.” If you want the
message on the Control Output Summary Screen to be “Fan On”
when the satellite contact is closed, enter “#1” as the contact closed
message etc.
Minimum Off Time: ____ seconds
Minimum On Time: ____ seconds
Specifies the minimum ON and OFF times for switching a load
to its opposite state (i.e., ON to OFF or OFF to ON). That is, once
the satellite contact closes it will remain closed for the minimum
ON time, and once it opens it will remain open for the minimum
OFF time. The range is 0 to 60 seconds or minutes, depending on
the unit of time selected. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Seconds, Minutes>
Override ______
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
< CLOSED, OPEN >
Closed means that the satellite contact will be forced closed when
the override statement is true. Open means the satellite contact
will be forced open. To make your selection, press the <space
bar> once for each choice until the desired override state has been
selected, and then press <Enter>.
When _____
This is where you enter a binary value.
WCC III Technical Guide
To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each
choice, and when the desired unit of time appears, press <Enter>.
Note that the minimum ON and OFF time has precedence over
demand limiting, overrides, etc.
Hysteresis:
= _____ x 0.1
Hysteresis is a software entry that allows an operator to specify
how much a measure variable, such as room temperature, has to
change before the switch changes state. For example, consider
a temperature setpoint of 72 °F with a +/-0.5 °F hysteresis. The
switch will change state (open/close) when the temperature rises
to 72.5 °F and will not switch back to its original state until the
temperature drops to 71.5 °F.
3-57
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Control Output Dual Limit Screen
The multiplier is automatically selected based on the data pattern
for the analog input associated with this screen. If the data pattern
is xxx.x, then 0.1 will appear as the multiplier. If a +/-0.5 hysteresis
is desired, input 5, and the system will multiply 5 by 0.1 to equal
0.5.
Low Limit High Limit
Local Set
_______ Between_______ & _______
On Schedule _______ Between_______ & _______
Off Schedule _______ Between_______ & _______
On Schedule (Alt)____ Between_______ & _______
Off Schedule (Alt)_____Between_______ & _______
This group of inputs specifies the setpoints for the “Local Set,”
“Normal,” and “Alternate” modes.
The “Local Set” setpoints are selected whenever the front end
computer quits communicating with the satellite controller.
The value of the input in the Schedule Control by field and the
Alternate Mode Selected by field determine which setpoints will
be used as shown below:
Schedule
Control by:
On
On
Off
Off
Alternate Mode
Selected by:
Off
On
Off
On
Setpoint
On Schedule
On Schedule (Alt)
Off Schedule
Off Schedule (Alt)
In the first field you specify whether you want the satellite contact
to “Open” or “Close” when the value of the analog input is between
the limits. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available
choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<CLOSED, OPEN>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired contact state appears and then pressing <Enter>.
Data register is measured from ______ and ______
Hysteresis.
For the phrase: “Data register is measured from ...”
<Midpoint, Nearest Limit>
and for the phrase: “and __________ Hysteresis.”
<Ignores, Reflects>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired definition appears and then pressing <Enter>.
If “Midpoint” is selected, the value of the data register will be the
difference between the actual value of the analog input associated
with this screen, such as room temperature, and the midpoint
between the two setpoints.
If “Nearest Limit” is selected, the value of the data register will
be the difference between the actual value of the analog input
associated with this screen, such as room temperature, and the
nearest setpoint.
See the Data Register write-up in the General Instructions section
of this guide on page 1-9 for more information.
Logical Off is “ . . . . . “
This means that this value is Off and has no schedule control. This
value can be overridden on the Override Schedules Screen. Same
as “0”.
Null Value is “ / / / / “
This means that this value is neither On nor Off, but can also
be On or Off in certain circumstances. It is best not to leave the
Null Values in place. This value CANNOT be overridden on the
Override Schedules Screen. This value can also mean negative
infinity.
If you have an application where you want the low limit to be
negative infinity, input the slash (/) for the low limit value. The
system will show a series of minus signs as the (-----) setpoint. In
the same manner, if you want the high limit to be positive infinity,
input the slash (/) as the high limit value. The system will show a
series of plus signs (+++++) as the input value.
3-58
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Control Output Time Clock Screen
Control Output Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXKYh or c, where XXX = Satellite Address #, K = Control Output,
Y = Control Output #, h = Heat (General Purpose), and c = Cool (General Purpose)
TIME CLOCK SCREEN
Satellite # 1
CONTROL OUTPUT #__1
Mode:
Time Clock
“H” Contact
Description:
S1-K1h
Contact is:
CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
Contact
Contact
Minimum
Minimum
in
in
in
in
Open Message #:
Closed Message #:
Off Time: 0 Seconds
On Time: 0 Seconds
“On” Schedule
Primary Alternate Mode
Secondary Alternate Mode
Local Set
2 Lght Off
1 Lght On
Selected by: 1
Selected by: ////
Selected by: ////
HOME for menu
Satellite #: ____
Mode: ______________
Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing.
If you would like to edit a different satellite, simply position the
cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys,
enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>.
Specifies the mode type of the currently specified contact. Because
this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed
at the bottom of the screen:
Control Output ____
This field actually contains two separate fields. The first field
specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog
output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because
this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed
at the bottom of the screen:
<ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT,
TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once
for each choice, until the desired point type has been selected. (If
you select a point type that is different than that currently being
displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen
and data.) The second field specifies the point number to edit. For
the Control Output Screen, this number can range from one to
eight. If you would like to edit a different point, simply position
the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys,
enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>.
WCC III Technical Guide
<Undefined, EA Driver, Time Clock, Dual Limit>
To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>. (If you select a mode type that is different than
that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the
appropriate screen information.)
______ Contact
Specifies which of the two available contacts per point (H or C)
to configure. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available
choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
< H,C >
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then press
<Enter>.
Note that the H and C contact designations do not mean that
the contacts must be used to control heating or cooling loads,
respectively. They are independent contacts.
3-59
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Control Output Time Clock Screen
Description:
_____________
A short message is entered here which will be displayed on Summary
and Data Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering points
within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control
codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed).
Contact Open Message #: ____
Contact Closed Message #: ____
Specifies a pair of message numbers, the first for the contact open
state and the second for the contact closed state. These numbers
refer to a message on the On/Off Message Screen. For example,
message #1 might be “Fan On” and message #2 “Fan Off.” If
you want the message on the Control Output Summary Screen to
be “Fan On” when the satellite contact is closed, enter “#1” as the
contact closed message etc.
Minimum Off Time:
Minimum On Time:
_____ seconds
_____ seconds
Specifies the minimum ON and OFF times for switching a load
to its opposite state (i.e., ON to OFF or OFF to ON). That is, once
the satellite contact closes it will remain closed for the minimum
ON time, and once it opens it will remain open for the minimum
OFF time. The range is 0 to 60 seconds or minutes, depending on
the unit of time selected. Because this is a “choice” field, the list
of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Seconds, Minutes>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice, and when the desired unit of time appears, press the
<Enter> key.
Contact is:
_________in “On” Schedule
Selected by:________
_________in Primary Alt Mode
Selected by:________
_________in Secondary Alt Mode Selected by:________
_________in Local Set
Selected by:________
The first field specifies whether the satellite contact is to Open or
Close when the binary value entered in its Selected by field goes
On.
The Primary Alt mode has highest priority, followed by Secondary
Alternate, and then On Schedule.
Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices
will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<OPEN, CLOSED>
On the “On” schedule
< OPEN, CLOSED, HOLD LAST >
On the Primary Alt Mode, Secondary Alt Mode, and Local Set
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Note that the HOLD LAST is available for Primary Alt,
Secondary Alt and Local Set modes only. If HOLD LAST is
selected in the Local Set mode, the contact will stay closed if
it was closed at the time the satellite went into local set or will
stay open if it was open when the satellite went into local set.
Note that the minimum ON and OFF time has precedence over
demand limiting, overrides, etc.
3-60
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Control Output Time Clock Screen
WCC III Technical Guide
3-61
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Control Output Time Clock Screen
3-62
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Output Summary Screen
Analog Output Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXPY, where XXX = Satellite Address #,
P = Analog Output, Y = Analog Output #
ANALOG OUTPUT SUMMARY SCREEN
Analog Output
Satellite #
1
Sat. #1
Time
08:53
Date
1/20
Analog Outputs
COMMENTS
P1:
P2:
P3:
P4:
P5:
P6:
P7:
P8:
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
STATUS
MODE
CURRENT INPUT
INPUT RANGE
OUTPUT RANGE
10.0 V
10.0 V
10.7 V
V
V
5.0 V
5.0 V
5.0 V
alt
alt
alt
alt
alt
alt
alt
alt
99.0 Deg F
99.0 Deg F
99.0 Deg F
20.0
20.0
20.0
-
80.0
80.0
80.0
5.0 - 10.0 V
5.0 - 10.0 V
5.0 - 10.0 V
9.0 Deg F
9.0 Deg F
9.0 Deg F
20.0
20.0
40.0
-
80.0
80.0
80.0
5.0 - 10.0 V
5.0 - 10.0 V
5.0 - 10.0 V
HOME for menu
An analog output is a proportional DC voltage supplied by the
SAT III with a maximum range of 0-15 VDC. The analog outputs
are proportional only, not proportional plus integral (PI), or
proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID).
To view or edit a specific analog output, use the arrow keys to move
the cursor (shown as “>” along the left hand side of the screen) to
the desired point, and press <Enter>. The Analog Output Screen
for the specified point will appear.
Analog Out
Time / Date
Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a
“choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the
bottom of the screen.
The current time and date will automatically be displayed here.
<Analog Input, Control Output, Analog Output,
Trend Logging, Logic Switch, Binary Output>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired
summary type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. If you
select a summary type that is different than that currently being
displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the new information.
COMMENTS
The description message which is entered on the individual Analog
Output Screens will automatically appear here to help you identify
the different analog outputs within the system.
STATUS
The amount of DC voltage supplied by the analog output is shown
here to help you monitor the status of the analog output.
Satellite ______
Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently
communicating with. If you would like to view the analog output
summary data for a different satellite, use the arrow keys to
move the cursor to this field, enter the desired number, and press
<Enter>.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-63
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Output Summary Screen
MODE
INPUT RANGE
An “alt” message may be displayed in this column to inform you
that analog output is in its alternate mode. When the status of the
binary input which has been entered on the analog output screen to
select the alternate mode is “ON,” the alternate control limits are
used, and the “alt” message is shown here.
You specify an output voltage for a given analog input signal on
the Analog Output Screen. The values which are input on the
analog output screen are shown here. For example, if you input the
following ranges on the Analog Output Screen:
CURRENT INPUT
The value of the analog input associated with the Analog Output
Screen is automatically displayed here. For example, if you are
controlling a chilled water valve based on supply air temperature,
the supply air temperature will be shown here.
3-64
OUTPUT RANGE
Output = 0.0 volts when input is 50.0 °F
Output = 15.0 volts when input is 60.0 °F
The Summary Screen would look like this:
INPUT RANGE
OUTPUT RANGE
50.0 - 60.0
0.0 - 15.0 V
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Output Screen
Analog Output Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXPY, where XXX = Satellite Address #,
P = Analog Output, Y = Analog Output #
ANALOG OUTPUT SCREEN
Satellite # 1
Description:
ANALOG OUTPUT #
P1
Filter time constant:
0 seconds
Controlled by input:
A1
Output
Output
2
= 5.0 volts when input is
= 10.0 volts when input is
20.0 Deg F
80.0 Deg F
Alternate Mode selected by:
Selected by:
Output
Output
....
= 0.0 volts when input is
= 0.0 volts when input is
0.0 Deg F
0.0 Deg F
When calculated output below 5.0 volts, set output to 5.0 volts
When calculated output above 10.0 volts, set output to 10.0 volts
HOME for menu
Satellite # _____
Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If
you would like to edit a different satellite, move the cursor to this
field using arrow keys, enter the desired satellite number, and press
<Enter>. 1 to 239.
Analog Output #_____
This field actually contains two separate fields. The first field
specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog
output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because
this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed
at the bottom of the screen:
<ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT,
TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired point type has been selected. (If you select
a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the
screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.)
This second field specifies the point number to edit. For the
Analog Output Screen, this number can range from one to eight,
corresponding from P1 to P8, respectively. If you would like to
edit a different point, simply position the cursor to this field by
using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired point
number, and press <Enter>.
Description
This is displayed on Summary and Data Entry/Editing Screens to
aid you in remembering points within the system. You may enter
up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double
quote character are not allowed).
Filter
Time
Constant:
_____ seconds
Specifies the reaction rate of the analog output. This is generally
used to slow down the rate at which the analog output changes
voltage to reduce “hunting.”
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
< 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 >
WCC III Technical Guide
3-65
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Output Screen
To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired filter time constant has been selected, and
then press <Enter>.
For example, if
Output = 0.0 volts when input is 72 °F
Output = 15.0 volts when input is 76 °F
Controlled by input:
Specifies the [analog] point address that acts as the input signal
source for the control range specified. The output voltage is
proportional to the value of this input.
Output = ___._ volts when input is _____
Output = ___._ volts when input is _____
Specifies the output voltage range for a given analog input signal.
The maximum output range is 0 to 15 volts D.C., and may be
specified in such a way as to allow a proportional (direct acting)
or an inversely proportional (reverse acting) output voltage.
(Alternate and normal modes each have an output voltage range
specification.)
is used, the output will range from 0 to 15 volts when the input
signal is from 72 °F to 76 °F. If the input signal is less than 72 °F or
greater than 76 °F, the output will be 0 and 15 volts, respectively.
Selected by:
Specifies the [binary] point address that initiates the Alternate
mode. When this address is zero (or OFF), the Normal output
range is selected; when it is one (or ON), the Alternate output range
is selected.
When calculated output below xx.x volts, set output
to xx.x volts
When calculated output above xx.x volts, set output
to xx.x volts
This field allows you to enter a defined range for output voltage.
When the calculated output falls below a determined voltage, set
the output to a defined voltage. When the calculated output goes
past a determined voltage, set the output to a defined voltage.
3-66
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Output Screen
WCC III Technical Guide
3-67
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
WCC III System Logging
WCC III SYSTEM LOGGING
SAT TREND LOGGING
Additional WCC III system long-term trend logging is available
with the WCC3Trendlog.exe program. Any of the following point
addresses can be trend logged:
The WCC III system SAT III Controller has four trend modes
described below. A SAT cannot trendlog another SAT Analog or
Binary Control Point. The Satellite Controller can only trendlog
its own inputs and output. Week Schedules, Global Binary, Global
Analog, and Optimal Starts can be trendlogged on any Satellite
Controller.
Satellite Binary Inputs
Satellite Analog Inputs
Satellite Analog Outputs
SAT Change of State
Satellite Binary Outputs
A trend logging mode which records any changes of state (i.e.
“OFF” going to “ON” or “ON” going to “OFF”) of a binary value
along with the time and date of the change. Acceptable values are
0, 1, GBXXX, KXh, KXc, WXX, SX, OXX, LXX, CX.
Satellite Control Outputs H Contact
Satellite Control Outputs C Contact
Satellite Data Register A
SAT Run Time Total
Satellite Data Register B
A trend logging feature which allows the WCC III to accumulate
the amount of time a binary value has been “ON” or “OFF.”
Acceptable values are 0, 1, GBXXX, KXh, KXc, WXX, SX,
OXX, LXX, CX.
Satellite Run Times
Satellite Logic Switch
WCC Global Analog
SAT Analog Trend
WCC Global Binary
A trend logging mode which records the value of a measured
variable, such as room temperature, at programmed time intervals.
Acceptable values are AX, PX, GAXXX, RXA, RXB.
WCC Week Schedule
WCC Optimal Start
The WCC3 Trendlog.exe program allows that any of these points
can be charted and graphed and saved. There is an additional option
to save this data file as an ODBC database type file structure for
viewing in MS Access, Excel, or any other third party database
program that uses ODBC formatting.
3-68
SAT Analog Peak
A trend logging mode which records the highest and lowest value
of a measured variable along with the time and the date that the
peak occurred. Acceptable values are AX, PX, GAXXX, RXA,
RXB.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
SAT Trend Log Summary Screen
Satellite Trend Log Summary Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXTYc, where XXX = Satellite Address #, T = Trend Log,
Y = Point Number, c = Change of State
SAT TREND LOG SUMMARY SCREEN
Trend Logging
Point
T1c:
T2c:
T3c:
T4c:
T5c:
T6c:
T7c:
T8c:
Point
T1a:
T2a:
T3a:
T4a:
T5a:
T6a:
T7a:
T8a:
Satellite #
CHANGE OF STATE
Description
Last change
S1-K1h
16:23 12/09
S1-K2h
8:33 12/10
S1-K3h
16:23 12/09
S1-K4h
16:23 12/09
S1-K5h
16:23 12/09
S1-K6h
08:59 01/12
S1-K7h
16:23 12/09
S1-K8h
16:23 12/09
ANALOG TREND
Description
S1-A1
S1-A2
S1-A3
S1-A4
S1-A5
S1-A6
S1-A7
S1-A8
1
Sat.#1
Point
T1r:
T2r:
T3r:
T4r:
T5r:
T6r:
T7r:
T8r:
Last Sample
50.0 Deg F
0 Deg. F
0 Deg. F
0 Deg. F
0 Deg. F
0 Deg. F
9.0 Deg. F
99.0 Deg. F
Point
T1p:
T2p:
T3p:
T4p:
T5p:
T6p:
T7p:
T8p:
Time
09:08
RUN TIME TOTAL
Description
Current Val
S1-K1h
1870 Hours
S1-K2h
868 Hours
S1-K3h
1870 Hours
S1-K4h
1870 Hours
S1-K5h
1870 Hours
S1-K6h
1678 Hours
S1-K7h
1870 Hours
S1-K8h
1870 Hours
Date
01/20
Alarm Limit
5000 Hours
5000 Hours
5000 Hours
5000 Hours
5000 Hours
5000 Hours
5000 Hours
5000 Hours
ANALOG PEAK
Description
Low
High
S1-A1
0.0
50.0
S1-A2
0.0
0.0
S1-A3
0.0
0.0
S1-A4
0.0
0.0
S1-A5
0.0
0.0
S1-A6
0.0
0.0
S1-A7
0.0
9.0
S1-A8
0.0
99.0
Units
Deg. F
Deg. F
Deg. F
Deg. F
Deg. F
Deg. F
Deg. F
Deg. F
SAT Trend Log
Time / Date
Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a
“choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the
bottom of the screen:
The present time and date will automatically appear at these
locations.
<Analog Input, Control Output, Analog Output,
Trend Logging, Logic Switch, Binary Output>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired summary type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>. (If you select a summary type that is different
than that being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the
appropriate information.)
Satellite ______
Specifies the number of the satellite which you are currently
communicating with. If you would like to view the trend log
summary data for a different satellite, simply position the cursor to
this field using the arrow keys, enter the desired number, and press
<Enter>. To view or edit a specific trend log, simply position the
cursor (shown as “>“) using the arrow keys to the desired point,
and press <Enter>. The Trend Log Screen for the desired point
will appear.
WCC III Technical Guide
Point
The system automatically displays the “name” of each of the trend
log points.
T = Trend Log
1 - 8 = The number of the trend log
c = Change of State
r = Run Time
a = Analog Trend
p = Analog Peak
Description
The message which is entered on the specific Trend Logging
Screen is automatically displayed here to help you identify the
different trend logs within the system.
Each of the trend log modes have a heading such a “Last Change,”
“Current Value,” etc. The most recent value of the individual trend
logs will automatically be displayed here.
3-69
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
SAT Change of State Trend Log Screen
Satellite Trend Log Summary Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXTYc, where XXX = Satellite Address #, T = Trend Log,
Y = Point Number, c = Change of State
SAT CHANGE OF STATE TREND LOG SCREEN
Satellite # 1
TREND LOGGING # 1
Records time & date of
state changes on: K1h
Off
On
Off
On
Off
-----------
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
10:01
10:04
00:00
10:55
00:00
S1-K1h
of Type: CHANGE OF STATE
Starting at: *:* on */*
Reset by: //// being ON
Roll after 48 readings
12/01
12/01
00/00
12/09
00/00
Satellite #: _____
Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing.
If you would like to edit a different satellite, simply position the
cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys,
enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>.
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<Enter>. (When you select a trend logging mode that is different
than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten
with the appropriate screen and data.)
Trend Log #: ____
Record time & date of state change on: ________
This field actually contains two separate fields. The first field
specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog
output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because
this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed
at the bottom of the screen:
Specifies the [binary] point address for which the change-of-states
are to be recorded.
<ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT,
TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that
currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the
appropriate screen and data.)
The second field specifies the point number to edit. For the Trend
Log Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you would
like to edit a different point, simply position the cursor to this field
by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired
point number, and press <Enter>.
Starting at:
00:00 on 00/00
Specifies the time and date that the trend log recording should
begin. (The time is represented in 24-hour format.) The system
considers *’s in these positions to be “wild cards.” Therefore, if
you want the system to always log the changes-of-state peaks
independent of the time and date, enter “*:* on */*.”
Reset by _________ being _____.
Specifies the [binary] point address that will be used to reset (or
clear) the record trend log data. The first field specifies the point
address, and the second specifies the state or condition that the point
address needs to be in to clear the data. Because this second field
is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at
the bottom of the screen:
<OFF, ON>
of Type
_________ after 48 readings
Specifies which of the four available trend logging modes (analog
peak, analog trend, change-of-state, and run time) you wish to use.
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Specifies whether the data logging process will stop after 48
readings have been taken or will continue (roll over). Because this
is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at
the bottom of the screen:
<ANALOG TREND, ANALOG PEAK,
CHANGE OF STATE, RUN TIME>
<Stop, Roll>
3-70
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
SAT Run Time Trend Log Screen
Satellite Trend Log Summary Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXTYr, where XXX = Satellite Address #, T = Trend Log, Y
= Point Number, r = Run Time
SAT RUN TIME TREND LOG SCREEN
Satellite # 1
TREND LOGGING # 1
of Type:
RUN TIME
Records total ON time
for Klh S1-Kh
Starting at : *:* on */*
Reset by: //// being ON
Current run time: 1871 Hours
Alarm Type: 0
Alarm Message #: 0
Alarm Limit: 9999 Hours
HOME for menu
Satellite #: _____
of Type
Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing.
If you would like to edit a different satellite, simply position the
cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys,
enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>.
Specifies which of the four available trend logging modes (analog
peak, analog trend, change-of-state, and run time) you wish to use.
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Trend Log #: ____
This field actually contains two separate fields. The first field
specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog
output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because
this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed
at the bottom of the screen:
<ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT,
TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired point type has been selected and then
press <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that
currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the
appropriate screen and data.)
The second field specifies the point number to edit. For the Trend
Log Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you would
like to edit a different point, simply position the cursor to this field
by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired
point number, and press <Enter>.
WCC III Technical Guide
<ANALOG TREND, ANALOG PEAK, CHANGE OF STATE,
RUN TIME>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<Enter>. (When you select a trend logging mode that is different
than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten
with the appropriate screen and data.)
Records total ____ time for: ______
Specifies the state (ON or OFF) and the [binary] point address for
which the run time is to be recorded. Because the state field is a
“choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the
bottom of the screen:
<OFF, ON>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired state has been selected, and then press
<Enter>.
3-71
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
SAT Run Time Trend Log Screen
Current run time: _____ seconds
Reset by _______ being ____.
This is the current accumulated run time. You may select the
units of time by positioning the cursor after the current run time.
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Specifies the [binary] point address that will be used to reset (or
clear) the record trend log data. The first field specifies the point
address, and the second specifies the state or condition that the point
address needs to be in to clear the data. Because this second field
is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at
the bottom of the screen:
<Hours, Seconds, Minutes>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired state has been selected, and then press
<Enter>.
Starting at:
00:00 on 00/00
Specifies the time and date that the trend log recording should
begin. (The time is represented in 24-hour format.) The system
considers *’s in these positions to be “wild cards.” Therefore, if
you want the system to log the run time independent of the time
and date, enter “*:* on */*.”
<OFF, ON>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired state has been selected, and then press
<Enter>.
Alarm Type: _____
Specifies the priority (or “importance level”) for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (high priority)
to eight (low priority). The system responds to higher priority
alarms first.
Alarm Message #: _____
Specifies a message number for the run time alarm condition. This
number is used by the system to reference a textual message which
is displayed on the Alarm Summary Screen.
Alarm Limit: ____ seconds
Specifies a time limit at which point an alarm will be activated. That
is, when the total run time exceeds this limit, an alarm indication
will be sent from the satellite. The units of time will be the same as
that selected for the current run time.
3-72
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
SAT Analog Trend Trend Log Screen
Satellite Trend Log Summary Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXTYa, where XXX = Satellite Address #, T = Trend Log,
Y = Point Number, a = Analog Trend
SAT ANALOG TREND TREND LOG SCREEN
Satellite #
1
TREND LOGGING #
Records value of: A1
S1-A1
once every: 15 Minutes
21:53
22:08
22:23
22:38
22:53
23:08
23:23
23:38
23:53
00:08
00:23
00:38
00:53
01:08
01:23
01:38
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
1/19
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
1
of Type:
ANALOG TREND
Starting at: *:* on */*
Reset by: .... being ON
Roll after 48 readings
01:53
02:08
02:23
02:38
02:53
03:08
03:23
03:38
03:53
04:08
04:23
04:38
04:53
05:08
05:23
05:38
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
06:08
06:23
06:38
06:53
07:08
07:23
07:38
07:53
08:08
08:23
08:38
08:53
09:08
09:23
09:38
09:53
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
1/20
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
HOME for menu
Satellite #: ____
Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing.
If you would like to edit a different satellite, simply position the
cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys,
enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>.
Trend Log #: ____
This field actually contains two separate fields. The first field
specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog
output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because
this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed
at the bottom of the screen:
<ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT,
TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired point type has been selected and then
press <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that
currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the
appropriate screen and data.)
WCC III Technical Guide
The second field specifies the point number to edit. For the Trend
Log Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you would
like to edit a different point, simply position the cursor to this field
by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired
point number, and press <Enter>.
of Type:
Specifies which of the four available trend logging modes (analog
peak, analog trend, change-of-state, and run time) you wish to use.
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<ANALOG TREND, ANALOG PEAK, CHANGE OF STATE,
RUN TIME>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<Enter>. (When you select a trend logging mode that is different
than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten
with the appropriate screen and data.)
3-73
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
SAT Analog Trend Trend Log Screen
Record value of: ______once every _____ minutes
_______ after 48 readings
Specifies the [analog] point address for which the analog trend is
to be recorded. Also specifies the time interval between samples
in either minutes or hours. Because this is a “choice” field, the list
of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Specifies whether the data logging process will stop after 48
readings have been taken or will continue (roll over). Because this
is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at
the bottom of the screen:
<Minutes, Hours>
<Stop, Roll>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired units of time have been selected.
Starting at:
00:00 on 00/00
Specifies the time and date that the trend log recording should
begin. (The time is represented in 24-hour format.) The system
considers *’s in these positions to be “wild cards.” Therefore, if you
want the system to always log the analog trend values independent
of the time, enter “*:* on */*.”
Trend Log Graph
The Analog Trend Screen has a graph which can be accessed by
pressing <Alt> <A> to access the Action Menu and then selecting
<Plot> or by pressing <Ctrl><G>. A graph which shows the value
of the analog global versus time should appear on the screen. If
the WCC III system is “re-painting” the screen at the moment you
access the graph, the full graph will not be displayed. To make
sure that you get a full graph on the screen, move the cursor to the
“Home” position on the screen. Press the <Home> key to return to
the Analog Trend Screen.
Reset by ___________ being _______
Specifies the [binary] point address that will be used to reset (or
clear) the record trend log data. The first field specifies the point
address, and the second specifies the state or condition that the
point address needs to be in to clear the data. Because this second
field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<OFF, ON>
3-74
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
SAT Analog Peak Trend Log Screen
Satellite Trend Log Summary Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXTYp, where XXX = Satellite Address #, T = Trend Log,
Y = Point Number, p= Analog Peak
SAT ANALOG PEAK TREND LOG SCREEN
Satellite # 1
TREND LOGGING #
Records time and date of high & low
peaks for: A1
S1-A1
Last Low Peak:
Last High Peak:
1
of Type:
ANALOG PEAK
Starting at: *:* on
Reset by: //// being ON
*/*
0.0 Deg F at 08:58:34 on 11/03
50.0 Deg F at 08:23 on 12/09
Satellite #: ____
Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If
you would like to edit a different satellite, position the cursor to
this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the
desired satellite number, and press <Enter>.
Trend Log #: ____
This field actually contains two separate fields. The first field
specifies the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog
output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because
this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed
at the bottom of the screen:
<ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT,
TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired point type has been selected and then
press <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that
currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the
appropriate screen and data.)
The second field specifies the point number to edit. For the Trend
Log Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you would
like to edit a different point, simply position the cursor to this field
by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired
point number, and press <Enter>.
of Type:
Specifies which of the four available trend logging modes (analog
peak, analog trend, change-of-state, and run time) you wish to use.
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
< ANALOG TREND, ANALOG PEAK,
CHANGE OF STATE, RUN TIME >
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired point type has been selected and then press
<Enter>. (When you select a trend logging mode that is different
WCC III Technical Guide
than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten
with the appropriate screen and data.)
Records time and date of high & low peaks for:
Specifies the analog point address for which the analog peaks
(high and low) are to be recorded.
Starting at:
00:00 on 00/00
Specifies the time and date that the trend log recording should
begin. (The time is represented in 24-hour format.) The system
considers *’s in these positions to be “wild cards.” Therefore, if you
want the system to always log the low and high peaks independent
of the time and dates, enter “*.* on */*.”
Reset by ______ being ____.
Specifies the [binary] point address that will be used to reset (or
clear) the record trend log data. The first field specifies the point
address, and the second specifies the state or condition that the
point address needs to be in to clear the data. Because this second
field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<OFF, ON>
Last Low Peak:
Last High Peak:
00.0 at 00:00 on 00/00
00.0 at 00:00 on 00/00
This is the actual trend log data. It is displayed by the system from
information received by the satellite. It details the value of the high
and low peaks and the time and date of their occurrence.
Press <Ctrl><R> to Reset Data
If you want to reset (clear) the existing trend log data, you may do
so by pressing and holding <Ctrl> and then pressing <R>. After
several seconds this will automatically reset (clear) the data on the
Trend Log Screen (you must leave the screen and come back to it
for the screen to clear). On new systems, each Trend Log Screen
should be reset after it has been programmed to clear out any
“random data” that might be in the satellite controller.
3-75
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Logic Switch Summary Screen
Logic Switch Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXLYY, where XXX = Satellite Address #,
L = Logical Switch, YY = Logic Switch #
LOGIC SWITCH SUMMARY SCREEN
Logic Switch
L1:
L2:
L3:
L4:
L5:
L6:
L7:
L8:
L9:
L10:
L11:
L12:
L13:
L14:
L15:
L16:
Description:
S1-L1
S1-L2
S1-L3
S1-L4
S1-L5
S1-L6
S1-L7
S1-L8
S1-L9
S1-L10
S1-L11
S1-L12
S1-L13
S1-L14
Sl-L15
S1-L16
On
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Message #:
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
__1
Sat. #1
Off
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Message #:
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Current
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
10:14
Config
On Board
On Board
On Board
On Board
On Board
On Board
On Board
On Board
On Board
On Board
On Board
On Board
On Board
On Board
On Board
On Board
1/20
Time Delay
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Logic Switch
Description
Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a
“choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the
bottom of the screen:
This location displays the descriptive message of the address. The
information comes from the description area of the logic switch
screen.
<Analog Input, Control Output, Analog Output,
Trend Logging, Logic Switch, Binary Output>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that
currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the
appropriate screen and data.)
Satellite #: ____
Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing.
If you would like to edit a different satellite, simply position the
cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys,
enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>.
On Message
The ON message for the logic switch is displayed here.
Off Message
The OFF message for the logic switch is displayed here.
Current Config
The current configuration of the logic switch will be displayed in
this location. The value will either be ON [On Board], ON [Off
Board], OFF [On Board], or OFF [Off Board].
Time Delay
The Time Delay value will be displayed in this location.
Time / Date
The present time and date will automatically appear in the upper
right corner of the screen.
3-76
To input data or to edit data on this screen, you need to access
the Logic Switch Screen by positioning the cursor (shown as “>”
along the left hand side of the screen) using the cursor positioning
(arrow) keys to the desired point, and press <Enter>. The Logic
Switch Screen will now appear.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Logic Switch Screen
Logic Switch Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXLYY, where XXX = Satellite Address #,
L = Logical Switch, YY = Logic Switch #
LOGIC SWITCH SCREEN
Satellite #1
L1:
L2:
L3:
L4:
L5:
L6:
L7:
L8:
L9:
L10:
L11:
L12:
L13:
L14:
L15:
L16:
Description:
S1-L1
S1-L2
S1-L3
S1-L4
S1-L5
S1-L6
S1-L7
S1-L8
S1-L9
S1-L10
S1-L11
S1-L12
S1-L13
S1-L14
S1-L15
S1-L16
HOME for menu
LOGIC SWITCH
On
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Message:
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Message: Current Config
Time Delay
Off
OFF
On Board
0
Off
OFF
On Board
0
Off
OFF
On Board
0
Off
OFF
On Board
0
Off
OFF
On Board
0
Off
OFF
On Board
0
Off
OFF
On Board
0
Off
OFF
On Board
0
Off
OFF
On Board
0
Off
OFF
On Board
0
Off
OFF
On Board
0
Off
OFF
On Board
0
Off
OFF
On Board
0
Off
OFF
On Board
0
Off
OFF
On Board
0
Off
OFF
On Board
0
<ANALOG IN, CONTROL O, ANALOG OU, TREND LOG, LOGIC SWI, BIN>
The Logic Switch Screen looks the same as the Logic Switch
Summary Screen except for the location of the “LOGIC SWITCH”
and “Satellite #” labels at the top of the page. You must access the
Logic Switch Screen to input or edit data.
Satellite # _____
Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing.
If you would like to edit a different satellite, simply position the
cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys,
enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>.
Logic Switch
Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a
“choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the
bottom of the screen:
<ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT,
TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT>
Description
Specifies a short textual message which is displayed on Summary
and Data Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering
points within the system. You may enter up to twelve characters
(control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not
allowed).
On Message
Off Message
Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for the switch open state
and the other for the switch closed state. These numbers are used
by the system to reference a textual message which is entered in
the Alarm Message Screen and then displayed in association with
this switch input.
Current
The current value of the logic switch will be displayed in this
location. The value will either be ON or OFF.
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than
that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the
appropriate screen and data.)
WCC III Technical Guide
3-77
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Logic Switch Screen
Config
ON Board
Time Delay
OFF Board
The Time Delay value will be displayed in this location. When
the input closes, it will stay on for this amount of time. Time is in
minutes.
ON Board is the corresponding dipswitch on the cover of the
SAT III, including the older binary input board that plugs into the
dipswitch socket. OFF Board is the new HSS port and the new
HSS binary input board.
NOTE:
This function is only used with the HSS Binary Input
Board.
ON OFF
STATUS
SAT REC
BATT ON/ OFF
PULSE INPUT
OPTION 3
OPTION 2
OPTION 1
LOCAL SET DISABLE
LOCAL SET
TEST
SAT III
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
HSS REC
ANALOG INPUT
JUMPER SELECTION
HSS XMIT
ON OFF
L16
L15
L14
L13
L12
L11
L10
L9
LOCAL SET
STATUS 1
BINARY
INPUTS
STATUS 2
STATUS 3
ON OFF
L8
L7
L6
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SAT ADDRESS
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
0 TO 1V
INPUT
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
0 TO 5V
INPUT
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
0 TO 10V
INPUT
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
THERMISTOR
INPUT
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
CURRENT
INPUT
A 4 TO 20 mA SENSOR WILL REQUIRE A
50 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR
A 1 VOLT INPUT, OR A 250 OHM LOAD
RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 5 VOLT INPUT.
A 2 WIRE ROOM SENSOR WILL REQUIRE
A 300 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET
FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT.
A 3 WIRE ROOM SENSOR WILL NOT
REQUIRE A LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET
FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT.
WattMaster Controls Inc.
OMRON
G5Q-1A4
24V
VDE
5A30VDC
A250VAC ~
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
SA
H
BINARY
INPUTS
PIN #1
ON OFF
TO OTHER
SAT III OR TO
WCC III - MCD
SAT XMIT
RI
PE
IS
N
PI
#1
WARNING: OBSERVE POLARITY
BETWEEN THE SAT III AND THE
BINARY INPUT BOARD - GROUND
CONNECTIONS MUST BE THE SAME.
PIN #1
24VAC
120VAC
TO OTHER
SAT III OR TO
WCC III - MCD
WIRE "T" TO "T"
"R" TO "R"
"SHD" TO "SHD"
120VAC WIRING IS BY OTHERS
THE VA RATING FOR THE SAT III CONTROLLER IS 15VA.
THE VA RATING FOR THE WCC3 BINARY INPUT BOARD (OE431-01) IS 5 VA.
THE VA RATING FOR THE WCC3 V-OUT RELAY BOARD (OE430-01) IS 10 VA.
THE VA RATING FOR THE WCC3 V-OUT RELAY BOARD (OE430-02) IS 20 VA.
CONTACT CLOSURE TO GND
ONLY
WHEN CONNECTING POWER
OBSERVE POLARITY
24VAC
GND
ST
REPLACE THE DIP SWITCH IN
THE SAT III COVER WITH THE
SUPPLIED RIBBON CABLE.
OBSERVE POLARITY
SEE MANUAL FOR DIP
SWITCH SETTINGS
DRY INPUT CONTACTS ONLY
TWO BINARY INPUT BOARDS MAY BE WIRED TO
THE SAT III CONTROLLER USING THIS METHOD.
CONNECT THE FIRST ONE TO L1 TO L8 SWITCH
BINARY INPUTS, AND THE SECOND ONE TO L9 TO
L16 SWITCH BINARY INPUTS.
CONNECTION FROM SAT III TO BINARY INPUT BOARD
USING THE "OLD" RIBBON CABLE CONNECTION METHOD
The Binary Input with Time Delay board provides a terminal point for
landing wire for a external input switch / relay contact. It interfaces to the
SAT III controller via a supplied 16 pin ribbon cable with "DIP" connectors
on both sides.
OLD SAT II STYLE BINARY INPUT WITH TIME DELAY BOARD (YS101636)
Connect "P1" on the Binary Input board to one of the two removable
DIPSWITCHES on the cover of the SAT III controller. These two switches
are labeled Binary Inputs on the cover of the SAT III controller.
The eight Binary Inputs are dry contact closures to ground only.
There is a time delay switch on the Binary Input with time delay board.
This time delay switch determines how long the input will stay on after a
momentary switch contact is applied to the input of the Binary Input Board.
With the time delay dipswich (1 to 4) all OFF, there is no delay ON for all
eight inputs. Time Delay dipswitch (1 - .5) ON there is a 12 hour delay ON
for all eight inputs. Time Delay dipswitch (2 - 1) ON there is a 1 hour
delay ON for all eight inputs. Time Delay dipswitch (3 - 2) ON there is a
2 hour delay ON for all eight inputs. These Dipswitch settings are additive.
With Time Delay dipswitch (1 - .5, 2 - 1, and 3 - 2) ON there is a 3 12 hour
delay ON for all eight inputs.
This Binary Input board power requirements are 24VAC and it draws 5 VA.
The 24VAC power Connection is TB2, and you must observe polarity when
connecting this power connection to the SAT III.
3-78
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Logic Switch Screen
+V
ATI
ON OFF
STATUS
SAT REC
BATT ON/ OFF
PULSE INPUT
OPTION 3
OPTION 2
OPTION 1
LOCAL SET DISABLE
LOCAL SET
TEST
L
O
A
D
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
HSS REC
GND
L16
L15
L14
L13
L12
L11
L10
L9
V
OUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CHANNEL
L8
L7
L6
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
H
STATUS 1
BINARY
INPUTS
STATUS 2
STATUS 3
C
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SAT ADDRESS
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
0 TO 1V
INPUT
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
0 TO 5V
INPUT
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
0 TO 10V
INPUT
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
THERMISTOR
INPUT
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
CURRENT
INPUT
A 4 TO 20 mA SENSOR WILL REQUIRE A
50 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR
A 1 VOLT INPUT, OR A 250 OHM LOAD
RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 5 VOLT INPUT.
A 2 WIRE ROOM SENSOR WILL REQUIRE
A 300 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET
FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT.
A 3 WIRE ROOM SENSOR WILL NOT
REQUIRE A LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET
FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT.
WattMaster Controls Inc.
OMRON
G5Q-1A4
24V
VDE
5A30VDC
A250VAC ~
EACH CONTACT
IS RATED FOR
24VAC OR VDC
@ .5 AMP MAX
H
BINARY
INPUTS
PIN #1
ON OFF
COM
SA
LOCAL SET
ON OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TO OTHER
SAT III OR TO
WCC III - MCD
ANALOG INPUT
JUMPER SELECTION
HSS XMIT
ON OFF
0-15VDC
OUTPUT
MIN LOAD
IS 1K OHM
RESISTIVE
VDC ONLY
SAT III
SAT XMIT
24VAC
GND
ST
REPLACE THE DIP SWITCH IN
THE SAT III COVER WITH THE
SUPPLIED RIBBON CABLE.
OBSERVE POLARITY
SEE MANUAL FOR DIP
SWITCH SETTINGS
PIN #1
DRY INPUT CONTACTS ONLY
RI
PE
IS
N
PI
WARNING: OBSERVE POLARITY
BETWEEN THE SAT III AND THE
BINARY INPUT BOARD - GROUND
CONNECTIONS MUST BE THE SAME.
#1
TO OTHER
SAT III OR TO
WCC III - MCD
WIRE "T" TO "T"
"R" TO "R"
"SHD" TO "SHD"
WCC3 BINARY IN W/ TIME DELAY
WATTMASTER CONTROLS, INC
YS102072 REV 2
TWO BINARY INPUT BOARDS MAY BE WIRED TO
THE SAT III CONTROLLER USING THIS METHOD.
CONNECT THE FIRST ONE TO L1 TO L8 SWITCH
BINARY INPUTS, AND THE SECOND ONE TO L9 TO
L16 SWITCH BINARY INPUTS.
BROWN WIRE - GND
RED WIRE - 24VAC
BUTT SPLICE POWER
OBSERVE POLARITY
120VAC
120VAC WIRING IS BY OTHERS
THE VA RATING FOR THE SAT III CONTROLLER IS 15VA.
THE VA RATING FOR THE WCC3 BINARY INPUT BOARD (OE431-01) IS 5 VA.
THE VA RATING FOR THE WCC3 V-OUT RELAY BOARD (OE430-01) IS 10 VA.
THE VA RATING FOR THE WCC3 V-OUT RELAY BOARD (OE430-02) IS 20 VA.
CONTACT CLOSURE TO GND
ONLY
SUPPLIED
PC-01 CABLE
24VAC
CONNECTION FROM SAT III TO BINARY INPUT BOARD
USING THE "OLD" RIBBON CABLE CONNECTION METHOD
The new WCC3 Binary Input /w time delay board provides a terminal point
NEW WCC HSS BINARY INPUT WITH TIME DELAY BOARD (YS102072)
for landing wire for a external input switch / relay contact. It can interface to
the SAT III controller via a 16 pin ribbon cable with "DIP"
connectors on both sides. Connect "J1" on the Binary Input board to one of
the two removable DIPSWITCHES on the cover of the SAT III controller.
These two switches are labeled Binary Inputs on the cover of the SAT III
WCC3 BINARY IN W/ TIME DELAY
WATTMASTER CONTROLS, INC
controller. Or an alternative method of connection to the SAT III
YS102072 REV 2
controller is provided by the 6 pin HSS communications port on the side
of the SAT III controller.
The eight Binary Inputs on the new WCC3 Binary Input /w time delay
board are dry contact closures to ground only.
There is a time delay switch on the new WCC3 Binary Input /w time delay
board. This time delay switch determines how long the input will stay on
after a momentary switch contact is applied to the input of the new WCC3
Binary Input /w time delay Board.
With the time delay dipswitch (1 to 6) all OFF, there is no delay ON for all
eight inputs. Time Delay dipswitch (1 - 15 MIN) ON there is a 15 minute
C
US
delay ON for all eight inputs. Time Delay dipswitch (2 - 30 MIN) ON
there is a 30 minute delay ON for all eight inputs. Time Delay dipswitch
(3 - 1 HOUR) ON there is a 1 hour delay ON for all eight inputs. Time Delay
dipswitch (4 - 2 HOUR) ON there is a 2 hour delay ON for all eight inputs.
Time Delay dipswitch (5 - 3 HOUR) ON there is a 3 hour delay ON for all
eight inputs. Time Delay dipswitch (6 - 4 HOUR) ON there is a 4 hour delay
ON for all eight inputs. These Dipswitch settings are additive.
With Time Delay dipswitch (1 - 15 MIN, 2 - 30 MIN, and 3 - 1 HOUR) ON
there is a 1 hour and 45 minute delay ON for all eight inputs.
NOTE:
This Time Delay dipswitch is ignored when the Binary Input w/ time delay board is
connected via the HSS port. There are 16 independant time delays on the Binary Input
screen of the WCC III front end software. One for each of the 16 binary inputs.
The eight input status LEDs on the new WCC3 Binary Input /w time delay board
will not stay lit during a time delay when it is connected to the SAT III via the HSS port.
R
This Binary Input board power requirements are 24VAC and it draws 5 VA.
The 24VAC power Connection is P2 or P3, and you must observe polarity when
connecting this power connection to the SAT III.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-79
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Logic Switch Screen
SAT III CONTROLLER
SAT III
HSS PORT
UP TO TWO WCC3 BINARY INPUT W/TIME
DELAY BOARDS MAY BE WIRED TO THE
SAT III CONTROLLER USING THIS
METHOD. CONNECT THE FIRST WCC3
BINARY INPUT W/TIME DELAY BOARD
HSS PORT TO THE SAT III CONTROLLER
HSS COMMUNICATIONS PORT AND
THEN CONNECT THE FIRST WCC3
BINARY INPUT W/TIME DELAY BOARD
TO THE SECOND WCC3 BINARY INPUT
W/TIME DELAY BOARD VIA THE SECOND
HSS PORT ON THE FIRST WCC3 BINARY
INPUT W/TIME DELAY BOARD .
ADDITIONALLY, UP TO TWO V-OUT RELAY
BOARDS MAY ALSO BE CONNECTED
TO THE SAT III CONTROLLER HSS PORT.
ON OFF
SAT III
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
SAT XMIT
HSS REC
ANALOG INPUT
JUMPER SELECTION
HSS XMIT
ON OFF
L16
L15
L14
L13
L12
L11
L10
L9
LOCAL SET
STATUS 1
BINARY
INPUTS
STATUS 2
STATUS 3
ON OFF
L8
L7
L6
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
H
ON OFF
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BINARY
INPUTS
SAT ADDRESS
24VAC
GND
DRY INPUT CONTACTS ONLY
CONTACT CLOSURE TO GROUND
ONLY. NO 24VAC INPUTS
STATUS
SAT REC
BATT ON/ OFF
PULSE INPUT
OPTION 3
OPTION 2
OPTION 1
LOCAL SET DISABLE
LOCAL SET
TEST
SEE MANUAL FOR
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
WCC3 BINARY IN W/ TIME DELAY
WATTMASTER CONTROLS, INC
YS102072 REV 2
24VAC
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
0 TO 1V
INPUT
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
0 TO 5V
INPUT
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
0 TO 10V
INPUT
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
THERMISTOR
INPUT
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
CURRENT
INPUT
TO OTHER
SAT III OR TO
WCC III - MCD
A 4 TO 20 mA SENSOR WILL REQUIRE A
50 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR
A 1 VOLT INPUT, OR A 250 OHM LOAD
RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 5 VOLT INPUT.
A 2 WIRE ROOM SENSOR WILL REQUIRE
A 300 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET
FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT.
A 3 WIRE ROOM SENSOR WILL NOT
REQUIRE A LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET
FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT.
WattMaster Controls Inc.
WARNING: OBSERVE POLARITY
BETWEEN THE SAT III AND THE
BINARY INPUT BOARD - GROUND
CONNECTIONS MUST BE THE SAME.
120VAC
TO OTHER
SAT III OR TO
WCC III - MCD
WIRE "T" TO "T"
"R" TO "R"
"SHD" TO "SHD"
120VAC WIRING IS BY OTHERS
THE VA RATING FOR THE SAT III CONTROLLER IS 15VA.
THE VA RATING FOR THE WCC3 BINARY INPUT BOARD (OE431-01) IS 5 VA.
THE VA RATING FOR THE WCC3 V-OUT RELAY BOARD (OE430-01) IS 10 VA.
THE VA RATING FOR THE WCC3 V-OUT RELAY BOARD (OE430-02) IS 20 VA.
BINARY INPUT BOARD GETS POWER AND COMMUNICATIONS TO AND FROM THE SAT III FROM THIS HSS CABLE
HSS CABLE - ORDER STANDARD LENGTHS OF 1 FOOT, 1.5 FOOT, 3 FEET, 25 FEET, 40 FEET, 80 FEET AND 120 FEET MAX
CONNECTION FROM A SAT III CONTROLLER TO WCC3 BINARY INPUT W/TIME DELAY BOARD USING THE "NEW" HSS CABLE CONNECTION METHOD
3-80
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Output Summary Screen
Binary Output Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXOYY, where XXX = Satellite Address #,
O = Binary Output, YY = Binary Output #
BINARY OUTPUT SUMMARY SCREEN
Binary Output
Satellite # __2
Sat. #2
Time Date
08:49 1/23
Binary Outputs
COMMENTS
Bo1:
Bo2:
Bo3:
Bo4:
Bo5:
Bo6:
Bo7:
Bo8:
Bo9:
Bo10:
Bo11:
Bo12:
Bo13:
Bo14:
Bo15:
Bo16:
S1-BO1
S1-BO2
S1-BO3
S1-BO4
S1-BO5
S1-BO6
S1-BO7
S1-BO8
S1-BO9
S1-B10
S1-B11
S1-B12
S1-B13
S1-B14
S1-B15
S1-B16
STATUS
MODE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
RUN
TIME
TIME
DELAY
2:55
2:55
2:55
2:55
2:55
2:55
2:55
2:55
2:55
2:55
2:55
2:55
2:55
2:55
2:55
2:55
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TOTAL
RUN TIME
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
ON
COUNT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LAST
ON TIME
00/00
00/00
00/00
00/00
00/00
00/00
00/00
00/00
00/00
00/00
00/00
00/00
00/00
00/00
00/00
00/00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
HOME for menu
Binary Output
Time / Date
Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a
“choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the
bottom of the screen:
The present time and date will automatically appear at these
locations.
<Analog Input, Control Output, Analog Output,
Tren Logging, Logic Switch, Binary Output>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than
that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the
appropriate screen and data.)
Satellite # _____
Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing.
If you would like to edit a different satellite, simply position the
cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys,
enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>.
WCC III Technical Guide
Comments
The description message which is entered on the Binary Output
Screen will automatically appear here to help you identify the
different binary outputs within the system.
Status
The present “ON” or “OFF” status of the binary output is shown
here. For example, if week schedule #1 (W1) has been input to
control the schedule, the message “ON” will appear here when
week schedule #1 is “ON” and “OFF” will appear when week
schedule #1 is “OFF”.
3-81
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Output Summary Screen
Mode when using the Analog Mode
Total Run Time
The “alt” message will appear here when the Analog Mode
Alternative Setpoint is active. When the status of the binary input
which has been entered in the Binary Output Screen to select the
“Analog Mode - Alternative controlled by” is “ON”, the alternative
setpoint is used, and the “alt” message will appear here.
This is the current accumulated run time.
Run Time
A trend logging feature which allows the WCC III to accumulate
the amount of time a binary output has currently been “ON” or
“OFF.” It will reset to zero and start over the next time it comes
on.
On Count
This is how many times the binary output has changed from “OFF”
to “ON”.
Last On Time
This is the time and date that the input was last “ON”. ON = Binary
switch contact closed.
Time Delay “Keep on Time”
When the binary output is on time to go off, this Time Delay will
keep it on an additional number of minutes.
3-82
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
WCC III V-Out Binary Output Board
WCC III Binary Output Board /
V-Out Board Sequence
There are two versions of the WCC III V-Out Binary Output Board
– one that has 8 fixed N.O. Relay outputs (OE430-01) and one that
has an individual output jumper selectable option for N.O. or N.C.
relay outputs (OE430-02). There are two modes of operation for
the WCC3 V-Out Relay Board – one is the V-Out mode and the
other is the Binary Output mode. These relay contacts are rated
for 1 Amp at 24 VAC/VDC operation. This WCC3 V-Out Relay
Board connects to the HSS expansion port on the side of the SAT
III Controller. The WCC3 V-Out Relay Board is an expansion
board that allows for another 8 binary outputs (relay contacts) to be
used with the SAT III Controller. Up to three of these WCC3 V-Out
Relay boards may be connected to the SAT III HSS expansion
port. Two boards in the Binary Output mode are supported and
one board in the V-Out mode is supported. One HSS WCC3 V-Out
board (OE430-01) will add 10 VA of VA load while the WCC3
V-Out board (OE430-02) will add 20 VA load to the SAT III power
requirement plus the loads that are connected to the 8 relay outputs
of the WCC3 V-Out Relay board.
WCC III Technical Guide
V-Out Mode Note:
These 8 Analog Input connections must
be connected to the 8 Analog Outputs of the SAT III Controller
in the V-Out mode of operation. These analog values are not
digitally transmitted via the HSS port on the SAT III to the
WCC3 V-Out Relay board in the V-Out mode.
There is a load protection device called a varistor across each of
the 8 relay output connections of the WCC3 V-Out Relay Board
that limits the allowable voltage to no more than 32 volts AC/DC
maximum at 1 amp current draw for each relay output contact.
Attempting to switch any voltage greater than 32 volts or current
draws of more than 1 amp per contact could and will result in
damage to the WCC3 V-Out Relay Board and/or to the SAT III
Controller.
The connecting HSS cable is available in 1 ft., 1½ ft., 3 ft., 25 ft.,
40 ft., 80 ft., and 120 ft. lengths. No more than 150 ft. of total wire
can be used to power a SAT III HSS loop.
3-83
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
WCC III V-Out Binary Output Board
The Dipswitch on the WCC3 V-Out Relay Board sets the various
modes of operation and dead band in the V-Out mode. Dipswitch
SW1-7 (MODE 2 – V-Out mode) and SW1-8 (MODE 1 – Binary
Output Mode) selects the MODE of operation for the WCC3
V-Out Relay Board.
If both MODE (SW1-7 and SW1-8) switches are OFF, then the
WCC3 V-Out Relay Board is in Binary Output mode. Binary
Output 1 to 8 is selected. If MODE 1 switch (SW1-8) is ON, then
Binary Output 9 to 16 is selected. If MODE 2 Switch (SW1-7) is
ON, then the V-Out mode is selected. You must cycle power to the
WCC3 V-Out Relay circuit board after setting dip switch SW1-8.
You may select any other dipswitch setting without cycling power
to the board.
SW-1 (1) (V-OUT MODE – ADDS 1 VOLT TO
DEAD BAND)
SW-2 (2) (V-OUT MODE – ADDS 2 VOLTS
TO DEAD BAND) (V-OUT MODE DEFAULT
SETTING ON)
SW1-3 (4) (V-OUT MODE – ADDS 4 VOLTS TO
DEAD BAND)
SW1-4 (8)
SW1-5 (16)
SW1-6 INVERT (V-OUT MODE) (FLIPS
CONDITION OF THE RELAY OUTPUTS)
SW1-7 MODE 2 (V-OUT MODE) (V-OUT MODE
DEFAULT SETTING ON)
SW1-8 MODE 1 (When changing this switch, you
must cycle power to the circuit board)
V-Out Mode of Operation (Hysteresis is
added to the Setpoint via setting of the SW1
Dipswitch)
When the WCC3 V-Out Relay Board is set for the V-Out mode
(SW1 – switch #7 ON), the relay output will turn ON when the input
voltage rises above 7.5 VDC (+/- .25V) plus the dead band setting
that is determined by SW1 settings. When the WCC3 V-Out Relay
Board is set for the V-Out mode, the relay output will turn OFF
when the input voltage drops below 7.5 VDC (+/- .25 V) minus the
dead band setting that is determined by SW1 dipswitch settings.
These dipswitch settings apply for all 8 inputs and outputs.
When SW1-1 is selected, 1 volt is added to the dead band.
(Dead band = +/- 1 volt)
When SW1-2 is selected, 2 volts are added to the dead band.
(Dead band = +/- 2 volts) (DEFAULT)
When SW1-1 and SW1-2 are selected, 3 volts are added to the
dead band. (Dead band = +/- 3 volts)
When SW1-3 is selected, 4 volts are added to the dead band.
(Dead band = +/- 4 volts)
When SW1-3 and SW1-1 are selected, 5 volts are added to the
dead band. (Dead band = +/- 5 volts)
The 8 analog inputs on the WCC3 V-Out Relay board must be
wired to the 8 analog outputs on the SAT III or SAT II Controller
in order for the V-Out mode to function. Also, the HSS expansion
port for power and ground connections to the SAT III Controller or
a special two wire power and ground pigtail must be provided for
connection to 24 VAC and GND to power the WCC3 V-Out Relay
Board. 24 VAC polarity must be maintained between the WCC3
V-Out Relay Board and the SAT III Controller. 24 VAC must be
wired to 24 VAC and ground to ground or else damage to the SAT
III or WCC3 V-Out Relay Board could result.
Binary Output Mode of Operation
When the WCC3 V-Out Relay Board is set for the Binary Output
mode (SW1 switch #8 is either ON or OFF and SW1 switch #7 is
OFF), the 8 relays of the WCC3 V-Out Relay board are controlled
by the WCC III program setup of the SAT Binary Output screens
for each satellite controller. SW1 – switch #8 OFF is Binary Output
Board address relays 1 to 8, and SW1 – switch #8 ON is Binary
Output Board address relays 9 to 16. This assumes that SW1 –
switch #7 is OFF.
3-84
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Output Screen
Binary Output Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is XXXOYY, where XXX = Satellite Address #,
O = Binary Output, YY = Binary Output #
BINARY OUTPUT SCREEN
Satellite #
1
BINARY OUTPUT #
Description: S1-BO3
Mode: BINARY
Contact Configuration: Normal Open
In local set contact set to: OPEN
Controlled by input: L3
Analog Mode setup:
Normal Setpoint:
0
Alternative Setpoint:
0
Hysteresis:
0
Alternative Controlled By
3
Contact
Contact
Minimum
Minimum
Open Message #:
2 off
Close Message #:
1 on
Off Time:
0 Minutes
On Time:
0 Minutes
Keep On Time:
0 Minutes
////
HOME for menu
Satellite # _____
Mode: __________
Specifies the number of the satellite you are currently editing.
If you would like to edit a different satellite, simply position the
cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys,
enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>.
Specifies the mode type of the input. Because this is a “choice”
field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom
of the screen:
Binary Output
Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a
“choice” field, a list of available choices will be displayed at the
bottom of the screen:
<ANALOG INPUT, CONTROL OUTPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT,
TREND LOGGING, LOGIC SWITCH, BINARY OUTPUT>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than
that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the
appropriate screen and data.)
Description
Enter a description for the output. The description can be up to 10
characters in length. This description will display in the Comments
field on the Binary Output Summary Screen.
WCC III Technical Guide
<BINARY, ANALOG>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then press
<Enter>.
Contact Configuration: __________
Specifies the type of configuration. Because this is a “choice” field,
the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the
screen:
<Normal Open, Normal Close>
Contact Open Message #: ____
Contact Closed Message #: ____
Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for the contact open state
and the second for the contact closed state. These numbers refer
to a message on the On/Off Units Message Screen. For example,
message #1 might be “Fan On” and message #2 “Fan Off.” If you
want the message on the Control Output Summary Screen to be
“Fan On” when the satellite contact is closed, enter “#1” as the
contact closed message etc.
3-85
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Output Screen
Minimum Off Time: ____ Minutes
Minimum On Time: ____ Minutes
Specifies the minimum ON and OFF times for switching a load to
its opposite state (i.e., ON to OFF or OFF to ON). That is, once the
satellite contact closes it will remain closed for the minimum ON
time, and once it opens it will remain open for the minimum OFF
time. The range is 0 to 255 minutes
Note that the minimum ON and OFF time has precedence over
demand limiting, overrides, etc.
In local set contact set to:
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<OPEN, CLOSED, HOLD LAST, Normal>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired default choice has been selected, and then
press <Enter>. The term local set means that communication is
lost between the MCD and the satellite controllers. If HOLD LAST
is selected in the Local Set mode, the contact will stay closed if
it was closed at the time the satellite went into this local set or
will stay open if it was open when the satellite went into local set.
Normal could be used depending on how this Binary Output is
programmed; it may or may not work in a local set condition.
Controlled by input:
Specifies the point address that acts as the input signal source for
the control range specified.
Keep On Time:
When the binary output is commanded to turn off, this will keep it
on an additional x amount of minutes.
Analog Mode setup:
Analog Mode setup includes normal setpoint, alternative setpoint,
hysteresis, and alternative controlled by fields.
Normal Setpoint:
If the “Controlled By” input value rises above this setpoint, the
binary output will be active. Satellite Analog Input 1 to 8.
Alternative Setpoint:
This is an alternate setpoint that is selected when “Alternate
Controlled By” is active.
Hysteresis:
Hysteresis is a software entry that allows an operator to specify
how much a measure variable, such as room temperature, has to
change before the switch changes state. For example, consider
a temperature setpoint of 72 °F with a +/-0.5 °F hysteresis. The
switch will change state (open/close) when the temperature rises
to 72.5 °F and will not switch back to its original state until the
temperature drops to 71.5 °F.
Alternative Controlled By
When this field control point is active, this field controls the
Alternative Setpoint. Values include Week Schedules, Global
Binary, Satellite Control Output, Satellite Binary Outputs.
3-86
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Alarm Summary Screen
ALARM SUMMARY SCREEN
Alarm Summary
Address Class Pending
Description
GB2
GB3
Linux Globe
Print Test
1
1
Alarm Message(s)
Time
08:06
Date
1/30
HOME for menu
Address:
Class:
This location designates the address which is, or has been, in alarm
and has not been acknowledged. The listing for the alarm addresses
will be in sequential order from the lowest satellite number to the
highest satellite number. Twenty alarms can be viewed on one
screen. To move from the present twenty alarms to the next set
of twenty alarms, simply press <PgDn> (Page Down) located
on the keypad to the right of the keyboard. To view the previous
twenty alarms, simply press <PgUp> (Page Up) also located on
the keypad.
This location designates the class level (1-8) which has been
assigned to the alarm. 1 is the highest priority, and 8 is the lowest
priority.
Description:
This location displays the description message of the address.
This information comes from the description area of the screen
corresponding to that particular address.
Alarm Message(s):
Alarm Screen Access
If you would like to view any of these alarms, you may move the
cursor (>) to the desired alarm by using the arrow keys located on
the keypad and then pressing <Enter>. This will bring you to the
summary screen of the point in alarm. At this summary screen you
may acknowledge the alarm if desired. (For further information on
acknowledging alarms, refer to the Analog Input Summary Screen
section on page 3-12.)
<Ctrl A> Acknowledge Individual Alarms
This location will display the alarm message associated with the
particular alarm. If the address was assigned two alarm messages
(a low message and a high message), the low alarm message
will appear under the time and date location, and the high alarm
message will appear under the Alarm Message(s) section.
If you have a high and/or low alarm message and wish to see at
what time and on what day the alarm occurred, you will need to
go to the summary screen for the particular address to view this
information.
An alarm may be acknowledged at the Alarm Summary Screen by
using the arrow keys to move the cursor (>) to the desired alarm
and pressing <Ctrl><A>. To perform a <Ctrl><A> function, press
<Ctrl> down and then press <A>, holding both keys down at the
same time and then releasing both keys.
<Alt A> Acknowledge All Alarms
<Alt A> will bring up the Action Menu
Alarms> can be initiated.
WCC III Technical Guide
and <Acknowledge All
3-87
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Satellite Summary Screen
SATELLITE SUMMARY SCREEN
Sat #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Location
Power-Up
Delay
S1-KC
5 Seconds
15 Seconds
KC Linux Test
20 Seconds
Bldg.#1 B.J. S240 10 Seconds
Non-Existent
Non-Existent
Non-Existent
Test Sat3D.5
2 Minutes
Test Sat3D.5
2 Minutes
Test Sat3D.5
2 Minutes
Test Sat3D.5
2 Minutes
Non-Existent
Non-Existent
Non-Existent
Non-Existent
Satellite #16
2 Minutes
Satellite #17
2 Minutes
Satellite #18
2 Minutes
Satellite #19
2 Minutes
Satellite #20
2 Minutes
Satellite Summary
Alarms
LOC TST
by-class
TYPE VER
12345678
3
2.15
12345678
3
2.14
12345678
3
2.14
12345678
3.5 2.14
Time Date
11:54 1/20
ERR
3 R
5 R
15 R
15 R
11:15
13:46
13:46
13:46
12/09/08
09/22/08
09/22/08
09/22/08
12345678
12345678
12345678
12345678
3D.5
3D.5
3D.5
3D.5
2.14
2.14
2.14
2.14
4
4
4
4
R
R
R
R
14:22
14:22
14:22
14:22
09/22/08
09/22/08
09/22/08
09/22/08
12345678
12345678
12345678
12345678
12345678
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
2.14
2.14
2.14
2.14
2.14
5
5
5
5
5
R
R
R
R
R
14:09
14:09
14:09
14:09
14:09
09/22/08
09/22/08
09/22/08
09/22/08
09/22/08
HOME for menu
Sat #:
Power-Up Delay:
Twenty satellites will appear on each Satellite Summary Screen.
If your system has more than twenty satellites, to view the next
twenty satellites, simply press <PgDn> (Page Down) located on
the keypad to the right of the keyboard. To view the previous
twenty satellites, simply press <PgUp> (Page Up) also located on
the keypad.
This feature allows the WCC III system to soft-start a building after
a main power failure. If power is lost to the building, the satellites
cannot control any of the equipment because everything will be
off. When power is restored, the binary output contacts on the
satellite controller will remain open for the power up delay time,
thus holding the equipment off. You may want to bring on a critical
satellite first (lighting) and less critical satellites later.
When first entering this Satellite Summary Screen, you will
experience a slight delay in acquiring information on the screen.
This is because the system request needs to travel the entire
communication loop to gather the information needed for this
particular segment of the program.
Location:
Caution:
Please note that the contacts in the SATELLITE
will remain open during the power up delay time. This should
be taken into consideration when you are deciding whether an
open contact in the satellite should cause the equipment to be
ON or OFF.
This location is a user entered message which may pertain to the
name of the satellite, the location of the satellite, etc.
3-88
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Satellite Summary Screen
Specific points may be soft-started within the satellite by using the
Shed/Restore Programs. (For more information, consult the Shed/
Restore Programs section of this guide.)
An asterisk (*) will appear to the right of the entered time when the
satellite is presently in the power up delay mode.
Alarms by class:
This location will display the eight alarm classes associated with
each satellite. When there is an alarm type active within the satellite,
the alarm type number will be in reverse-video. This will aid you in
acknowledging alarm conditions present within the satellite. After
viewing the alarm, you should go to the Alarm Summary Screen to
locate the alarm specifically.
LOC:
The “loc” message will appear if the “local set” switch on the front
of the satellite controller is in the ON position, causing the satellite
controller to operate in its local set mode.
TST:
This location will designate if you are operating the satellite
controller in the test mode. The test mode is active if the test switch
on the front of the satellite controller is in the on position. The test
mode can be used to check out the operation of the system. For
example, if a piece of equipment is controlled using the time clock
mode, “TEST” can be input as the binary value which closes the
contact to run the piece of equipment in question. To make sure
the system works properly, place the test switch in the on position
and the contact on the satellite controller should close to run the
piece of equipment in question. TEST can be overridden on the
Overrides Screen.
TYPE
The satellite type will appear here, either a SAT III, SAT3c, SAT3d,
or SAT3f.
Time / Date
The present time and date will automatically appear in these
locations.
WCC III Technical Guide
VER:
The satellite controllers have their own software. This location will
tell you what version of software your satellite controllers have.
This is necessary for any updates or changes in software for the
satellites in the future.
ERR:
This location is generally used for monitoring transmission and
receiving errors. This information is to aid in trouble-shooting
various problems associated with the communications of the
system.
SOS
If the system determines that a satellite controller has stopped
communicating, an SOS (Satellite Out of Service) message will
appear on the screen.
TOS:
If the SAT3C/D/F determines that a TUC controller has stopped
communicating, a TOS (TUC Out of Service) message will appear
on the screen.
Other Functions:
Clear Error/Clear All Errors:
While at the Satellite Summary Screen, select <Action>,<Clear
Error> to clear an error located in the ERR column. You must
have the desired row highlighted in order to do this. Select
<Action>,<Clear All Errors> to clear all errors.
Delete Satellite:
To delete a satellite, from the Main Menu Tool Bar, place the
cursor on the satellite you wish to delete and then select <Action>,
<Delete Satellite>.
Force Search Satellite:
To search for a satellite, from the Main Menu Tool Bar, place the
cursor on the satellite number you are searching for and then select
<Action>, <Force Search Satellite>.
3-89
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Rebuild Satellite Tables
REBUILD SATELLITE TABLES
The data pattern tables for the satellite controllers need to be
rebuilt whenever any of the following events occur:
1. A new WCC III system is installed.
2. New software is installed in the MCD or the satellite
controller.
3. New hardware is installed in the system (i.e. new
satellite controllers, new MCOMM communication
board in the MCD, etc.).
For a new system, or for new satellite controllers installed
in an existing system, the tables should be (re)built before the
programming data is entered.
Satellite Number:
Before a value is displayed on the screen, the system checks to
see where the decimal point should go. The pattern is called the
“Data Pattern.” In the WCC III system, there are four data patterns
allowed. They are “x,xxx”, “xxx.x”, “xx.xx”, and “x.xxx.” (The
x’s are used to denote numeric values and are not to be taken
literally.) Additionally, rebuilding the data tables insures that the
proper units of measure, ON/OFF, and alarm messages will be
displayed with its associated number.
This entry allows you to designate the number of the satellite
controller which will have its table rebuilt.
After the data tables are rebuilt, the data tables will be saved on
the hard disk.
Select this option to rebuild the data table for only one satellite.
Enter the satellite number and then select the option to <Rebuild
One Table>. To rebuild all tables, type a zero in the satellite
number field and select <Rebuild All Tables>.
Rebuild One Table:
Rebuild All Tables:
Rebuild Satellite Unit/Pattern Table:
To rebuild one or more satellite tables, from the Main Menu Tool
Bar select <Action>, <Rebuild Satellite Unit/Pattern Table>.
The following window will appear:
3-90
To insure proper rebuilding of tables, we recommend that you
select this option to allow the system to rebuild data tables for all
of the satellite controllers and the Global Analog Screens.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Override Screen
OVERRIDE SCREEN
ADDRESS
W12
S5
GB9
GA15
GA10
184K2C
Type/Value
Off
Off
On
72.5 Deg F
30.0 Deg F
Schd On
OVERRIDE SCHEDULES
Starting
TIME
MONTH
DAY
745
2
15
745
2
15
745
2
15
950
2
16
1130
3
17
900
4
11
TIME
845
845
845
1200
2200
1500
End
MONTH
2
2
2
2
3
4
DAY
15
15
15
17
18
14
HOME for menu
This screen allows you to override addresses within the system for
programmable time periods. The allowable choices for override
type depend on the password level.
With Level 1 Password, choices are <Schd On, Schd Off>
With Level 2 Password, choices are <SchdON, SchdOff>
With Level 3 Password, choices are <ALL>
Type/Value
The Type or Value of the address is entered in this position. A
binary type of address will have a type of either being ON or OFF.
An analog address will have a numerical value such as °F, PSI,
KW, % Sun, etc.
-----
Starting
ADDRESS
-----
End
This is a user entered field which initiates the Override program of
the WCC III system. Addresses which may be used on this screen
are shown below:
The Start and End portion of the program is where you enter the
Time, Month, and Day for the override to occur. The override will
erase itself from the screen after the override has been completed.
# = Satellite address number
Clear Structure
#An
#Pn
#KnH
#KnC
Wn
Sn
GBn
GAn
#RnA
#RnB
#Cn
#On
#Ln
-
Analog Input (n = 1 to 8)
Analog Output (n = 1 to 8)
Control Output (H Contact) (n = 1 to 8)
Control Output (C contact) (n = 1 to 8)
Week Schedule (n = 1 to 128)
Optimal Start (n = 1 to 64)
Binary Global (n = 1 to 512)
Analog Global (n = 1 to 256)
Data Register (n = 1 to 8)
Data Register (n = 1 to 8)
Comparator (n = 1 to 8)
Binary Out (n = 1 to 16)
Binary Input (n = 1 to 16)
WCC III Technical Guide
Select
-----
-----
<Clear Structure> from the Action Menu or select the
Clear Structure icon to clear the values from the screen.
NOTE:
Values entered may remain after you clear the
structure until you leave the screen and return to the Main
Menu and then open the Override Screen again.
3-91
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Holiday Schedule Screen
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE SCREEN
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE
TIME
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
-----------------------
Start
MONTH
10
11
11
11
11
11
-----------------------
DAY
26
2
9
16
23
30
-----------------------
TIME
2359
2359
2359
2359
2359
2359
2359
---------------------
End
MONTH
7
11
11
11
11
11
11
---------------------
DAY
4
2
9
9
16
23
30
---------------------
HOME for menu
--------Start-------TIME
MONTH DAY
---------End--------TIME
MONTH DAY
Enter the Start time, month, and day that you wish to begin a
holiday. Then enter the End time, month, and day that you wish
to end the holiday. The time is in 24-hour format, the month has a
range of 1 to 12 (1 for January and 12 for December), and the day
can range from 1 to 31 (depending on the month).
The Holidays may be entered up to one year in advance and may
be entered out of sequence.
Each week schedule has a location at the bottom of the screen
named HOL as shown in the Week Schedule Screen. This HOL
location becomes active on the dates listed on the Holiday Schedule
Screen.
There must be at least eight hours between the Start time and End
time of the Holiday. If a shorter time is needed, you will need to
set up the strategies within the Override Screen, described on page
3-91.
3-92
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Holiday Schedule Screen
Week Schedule Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is Wnn, where W = Week Schedule and nn = Week Schedule#
WEEK SCHEDULE 1
Description: Linux Week Schedule
Current status Night
Week
On Message #:
Off Message #:
DAY
7
8
Week Day
Week Night
EVENT
OFF
WED 0707
Password level req’d to alter:
EVENT
EVENT
EVENT
EVENT
EVENT
MON
TUE
on
on
0800
0800
off
off
1700
1700
-----
-----
-----
-----
WED
THR
on
on
0800
0800
off
off
1700
1700
-----
-----
-----
-----
FRI
SAT
on
on
0800
1000
off
off
1700
1400
-----
-----
-----
-----
SUN
HOL
off
off
1000
0000
off
---
-----
-----
-----
-----
3
HOME for menu
The week schedule will obey the entries listed on the HOL line
when a holiday occurs. In this example, the week schedule will be
OFF on the dates listed as holidays on the Holiday Screen. (When
the system sees ---, it will remain in its present state until it sees the
next on or off command.)
There must be at least eight hours between the Start time and End
time of the Holiday. If a shorter time is needed, you will need to
set up the strategies within the Override Screen, described on page
3-91.
The data on this screen DOES NOT erase itself after the holiday has
been completed. If you need to erase a particular holiday, simply
position the cursor over the value in the month column at the left
hand side of the screen of the holiday in question. Press <Ctrl>
and then <Home>, holding both keys down at the same time and
then releasing them. The <Ctrl><Home> feature will clear out one
holiday at a time. To perform the <Ctrl><Home> function, you
must have a level 3 access code.
NOTE:
Values entered may remain after you clear the
Holiday until you leave the screen and return to the Main Menu
and then open the Holiday Schedule Screen again.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-93
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
System Parameters Screen
SYSTEM PARAMETERS SCREEN
System Parameters
Page 1
Present Time
Authentication: Auto
Time
Month
Day
Year
User Name: [email protected]
0710
1
21
9
Password: MCD@8500
System ID: Kansas City (On the Wall) System.
Port Number 25
E-mail SMTP Server: mail.wcc-controls.com
Reply E-mail Address: [email protected]
Alarm Type
1
2
3
4
5
Operator:
Time out:
Disabled by
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
120 Minutes
E-mail Address
1st
2nd
3rd
1st
2nd
3rd
1st
2nd
3rd
1st
2nd
3rd
1st
2nd
3rd
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
Code:
Local print: YES
The WCC3 System Parameters Screen is used to enable, disable,
and setup E-mailing of Alarms for the WCC3 system.
Page:
The Page field at the very top of the WCC3 System Parameters
Screen refers to the fact that there can be up to 4 separate pages for
the setup of various E-mail addresses that then can be filled out, so
that up to 12 separate E-mail Addresses per Alarm type can send
out Alarm E-mails. These Alarm Call-out E-mails are based upon
“Alarm Type” 1 through 5 only. Alarm types 6, 7 and 8 do not, and
cannot, cause an Alarm Call-out E-mail to be sent out.
All of the programmed setup information for the “Present time”,
“Authentication:”, “User Name:”, “System ID:”, “Password:”.
“E-mail SMTP Server:”, “Reply E-mail Address:”, “Time out:”,
and “Local Print:” fields do not change with the Page toggle
function.
3-94
Name
Mark
Mark
Mark
Mark
Mark
Mark
Repeat
Lehman
Lehman
Lehman
Lehman
Lehman
Lehman
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Delay
5
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
View Screen Only
Present Time
Time Month Day Year:
Specifies the current time and date. The time is in 24-hour
format, the month has a range of 1 to 12 (1 for January and 12 for
December), and the day can range from 1 to 31 (depending on the
current month).
User Name:
Password:
For e-mail servers that require authentication, the username field
needs to have a valid user name. The password field needs to have
a valid password that matches with the User Name. Both of these
fields’ data comes from your Internet Service Provider or from
your IT Personnel.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
System Parameters Screen
The User Name can be up to 30 characters (control codes, ALT
codes, and the double quote character are not allowed). The
password can be up to 20 characters (control codes, ALT codes,
and the double quote character are not allowed). The User Name
and Password are the ones set up for the Backtask program’s e-mail
account. Both the user name and password are case-sensitive.
LOGIN:
Authentication:
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), are cryptographic protocols that
provide a level of security for secure communications over
networks such as the Internet.
For e-mail servers that require authentication, this field should
be set to Auto, Login or Plain. For e-mail servers that do not
require authentication, this field should be set to “No.” - See
your Internet provider and/or IT personnel for this setting.
E-mail authentication from the WCC3 system is the effort to
equip E-mail messages of the WCC3 e-mail transport system
with enough verifiable information, so that the End User
recipient’s E-mail server can recognize the nature of each
incoming message from the WCC III - MCD email’s SMTP
automatically without rejecting it as SPAM. WattMaster
Controls, Inc. supports 4 basic types of E-mail authentication—
AUTO, PLAIN, LOGIN, and CRAM-MD5.
AUTO:
In the WCC3 system, the selection for authentication
“AUTO” applies to The Password Authentication Protocol
(capitalized) and is sometimes abbreviated PAP. PAP is a simple
password authentication protocol that is used to authenticate a user
to a network access server used for example by internet service
providers. PAP is used by Point to Point Protocol to validate users
before allowing them access to server resources. Almost all network
operating system remote E-mail servers support PAP. It requires
that you have both a legitimate “User Name” and “Password”.
PLAIN: In the WCC3 system, the selection for authentication
“PLAIN” applies to unencrypted “Plain” text that is sent to and
from the E-mail SMTP server. It is most commonly associated
with a POP3 type E-mail server.
The Post Office Protocol (POP) is an application-layer Internet
standard protocol used by E-mail user accounts to send and
retrieve e-mail from a remote server over a TCP/IP connection.
POP and IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) are the two
most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e-mail retrieval.
Virtually all modern e-mail clients and servers support both. The
POP protocol has been developed through several versions with
version 3 (POP3) being the current standard.
WCC III Technical Guide
Login Authentication is a process closely related to
identification. In online E-mail environments where “login”
authentication is required, the username identifies the user, while
the password authenticates that the user is whom he or she claims
to be. Typically, the “Login” authentication is used on E-mail
servers with SSL type E-mail protocols.
CRAM-MD:
In CRAM-MD5 authentication, the server first
sends a challenge string to the client. The client responds with a
username followed by a space character and then a 16-byte digest
in hexadecimal notation. The digest is the output of HMAC-MD5
with the user’s password as the secret key and the server’s original
challenge as the message. The server also calculates its own digest
with its notion of the user’s password, and if the client’s digest and
the server’s digest match then authentication is successful.
This provides three important types of security. First, others cannot
duplicate the hash without knowing the password. This provides
authentication. Second, others cannot replay the hash—it is
dependent on the unpredictable challenge. This is variously called
freshness or replay prevention. Third, observers do not learn the
password. This is called secrecy. The two important features of this
protocol that provide these three security benefits are the one-way
hash and the fresh random challenge.
System ID:
The system ID field on the WCC3 System Parameters Screen
is used to identify the actual physical location of the WCC3
system. This System ID “Name” will be on all of the E-mails
that this specific WCC III - MCD will send out, in the center of
the Main Screen of the WCC3.exe program, and on the Energy
Consumption Table. This field on the WCC3 System Parameters
Screen is limited to 50 total characters (control codes, ALT codes,
and the double quote character are not allowed) for the System
ID.E-Mail SMTP Server:
3-95
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
System Parameters Screen
E-Mail SMTP Server:
Disabled by
(SMTP) Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is an Internet standard for
electronic mail (e-mail) transmission across Internet Protocol (IP)
networks. This field on the WCC3 System Parameters screen is
limited to 52 total characters for the E-mail address.
The Disabled by field is used to enable or disable the specific alarm
type. (Remember that there can be 4 pages of E-mail addresses.)
An “ON” or “1” disables the E-mailing of the Alarm type Callout
function per E-mail address. An “OFF” or “0” enables the E-mailing
of the Alarm type Call-out function per E-mail address.
WattMaster Controls can and will usually provide an initial E-Mail
SMTP server for the initial setup of the WCC III - MCD when it
is first installed. This SMTP Server that is provided by WattMaster
Controls is not guaranteed to last for the life of the WCC3 system.
At some point in the future, there may also be a service fee
associated with maintaining this SMTP server from WattMaster
Controls.
Port Number
The WCC3.exe program opens a two-way, secure communications
port that then allows for communication between WCC III – MCD
and the WCC3.exe program that is running on the WCC III front
end computer. This IP Address connection is done on a higher
address port number than normal (WCC III connection is port
number 39289) to help reduce the risk of computer hacking.
Port Number 25 should always be used on the WCC3 system,
but in rare instances other port addresses can be used to improve
security on the WCC III – MCD. This generally requires advanced
IT support for implementation.
Port Number “25” is the usual TCP port for common SMTP
operation.
Reply E-mail Address:
Some E-mail SMTP servers require a reply E-mail address during
the Authentication process.
The End User on the WCC3 system with internet access should
have an E-mail address that usually is provided with the static
internet address or static Host name that comes from the internet
service provider. This field on the WCC3 System Parameters
Screen is limited to 52 total characters for the E-mail address.
Alarm Type:
There are 5 Alarm types that can be programmed to send out an
Alarm E-mail to specific E-mail address.
3-96
This “Disabled by” field can be programmed with the following:
0 (OFF), 1(ON), WXXX (Week Schedules), SXXX (Optimal
Starts), GBXXX (Global Binaries), new day, new hour, new min,
GCXXX, GHXXX, GLXXX (Tenant Override groups), LOCSET
(Local Set Mode), TEST (TEST Mode), / = / / / / (For Null value).
Just remember that the / / / / is a Null function that is neither “ON”
or “OFF”, but is generally treated as “OFF” condition but not
always.
Email Address
The E-mail Address field on the WCC3 System Parameters
Screen is the E-mail address that you want send the specific
WCC3 Alarm E-mail that is based on Alarm type 1 to 5. There
can be up to 12 E-mail address per alarm type. This E-mail
Address field on the WCC3 System Parameters Screen is
limited to 50 total characters for the E-mail address.
1st, 2nd, 3rd Email Address
The “1st” E-mail Address is the primary or the first E-mail
address that the WCC3 alarm type (1 to 5) will send an E-mail
alarm to.
The “2nd” E-mail Address is the secondary or second E-mail
address that the WCC3 alarm type (1 to 5) will send an E-mail
to after sending the first E-mail of the alarm type.
The “3rd” E-mail Address is the tertiary or third E-mail
address that the WCC3 alarm type (1 to 5) will send an E-mail
to after sending the second E-mail of the alarm type.
NOTE:
On only the first 3 alarm class 1 E-mail addresses on
page 1 of the System Parameters E-mail addresses will receive
a automated Satellite Off System (SOS) E-mail message that is
sent out to these E-mail addresses when a Satellite controller or
multiple Satellite Controllers go off line (SOS). See the Alarms
section of this manual for more information on Satellite alarms.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
System Parameters Screen
Repeat
Code
The “Repeat” function is time in minutes to send out a repeated
E-mail after the first e-mail is sent, and keep repeat sending
this E-mail every “X” amount of minutes until the alarm is
acknowledged.
This code is short for “Passcode” which is a numerical value of
000000000 to 9999999999. This is for security purposes, as each
specific operator of the WCC3 system should have his or her
Operator’s Name and “Code” and then enter them in the space
provided. This “Code” field on the WCC3 System Parameters
Screen is limited to 10 total characters.
Delay
The “Delay” function is time in minutes before the E-mailing of
the alarm to the 2nd and 3rd E-mail addresses after the E-mail is
sent to the 1st e-mail address.
Operator
All WCC3 users or “Operators” should have their name entered
in this field. This is for security purposes, as each specific operator
of the WCC3 system should have his or her Operator’s Name and
“Code” and then enter them in the space provided. This “Operator”
field on the WCC3 System Parameters Screen is limited to 16 total
characters. Please note that all of this “Operator Log in” information
is kept track of in the WCC3 system log.
WCC III Technical Guide
Time Out
The time out is the time in minutes before the WCC3 program will
automatically sign you out after you have not moved the mouse or
pressed a key on the keyboard. All password levels are returned to
a password level 0.
Local Print:
This function is a carry over from the old WCC2 system and is not
used on the WCC3 system.
3-97
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Operator Codes Screen
OPERATOR CODES SCREEN
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Operator Codes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Level
Level
Level
Level
Operator
3
33333
John
Mark
1
2
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
Code:
3
3333
Rentko
Lehman
1
2
Level
3
3
3
3
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
View Only
General entry allowed
Level 1 + modes, globals & energy management options
Level 2 + system parameters & operator codes
HOME for system parameters
Operator
Level
Specifies the password that identifies an operator. A character,
symbol, number or a space (press <space bar>) should be entered
for 1-16 spaces (control codes, ALT codes, and double quote
characters are not allowed).
Specifies the level of priority that is to be assigned to an operator.
This value can range from zero (lowest priority) to 3 (highest
priority). These values are displayed at the bottom of the screen
and are explained in further detail on page 3-91.
Code
Specifies a password code for that operator. This protects the
system from unauthorized use. A character, symbol, number, or
space (press <space bar>) should be entered for 1-10 spaces
(control codes, ALT codes, and double quote characters are not
allowed).
3-98
Level 0 is view only access.
Level 1 is general entry allowed.
Level 2 is Level 1 + modes, globals, and energy management.
Level 3 is Level 2 + system parameters and operator codes.
HOME
Press <Home> to return to the System Parameters Screen.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
On/Off and Units of Measure Messages Screen
ON/OFF AND UNITS OF MEASURE MESSAGES SCREEN
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
On
Off
CWV *NO*
CWV *OK*
Flow
No Flow
Day
Night
No Call
Call
On/Off Messages
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Deg F
KW
GPM
Gallon
% RH
% Sun
Deg C
KW
Units-of-Measure Messages
9.
Volts
10.
-1011.
-1112.
-1213.
-1314.
-1415.
-1516.
-16-
Fan ON
Fan OFF
Pump ON
Pump OFF
are----->
-16-17-18Lites ON
Lites OFF
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Chlr. ON
Chlr. OFF
Pump ON
Pump OFF
-25-26-27-28-29-30-
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
-17-18-19-20-21-22-23-24-
HOME for menu
The WCC III system will accept up to 30 On/Off messages
which can have up to eight characters each. The number which
corresponds to the message is entered on a Data Input Screen. As
the number is entered, the system automatically prints the message
on the Data Input Screen and the appropriate summary screen(s).
If you are beginning to “program” the WCC III system for the first
time, you may wish to print these screens.
The WCC III system will accept up to 24 units of measure messages
which can have up to six characters each. The number which
corresponds to the message is entered on a Data Input Screen. As
the number is entered, the system automatically prints the message
on the Data Input Screen and the appropriate summary screen(s).
WCC III Technical Guide
3-99
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Alarm Messages Screen
ALARM MESSAGES SCREEN
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Alarm Messages
Low Temp
High Temp Alarm
GB1 (55-85)
Peak KW
Global Alarm
Temp Out of Range
-7-8R-T Alarm > Limit
-10-11-12-13-14-15-16-17-18-19-20-
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
-21-22-23-24-25-26-27-28-29-30-31-32-33-34-35-36-37-38-39-40-
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
-41-42-43-44-45-46-47-48-49-50-51-52-53-54-55-56-57-58-59-60-
HOME for menu
The WCC III system will accept up to 60 alarm messages which
can have up to 16 characters each. The number which corresponds
to the message is entered on a Data Input Screen. As the number is
entered, the system automatically prints the message on the Data
Input Screen and the appropriate summary screen(s).
If you are beginning to “program” the WCC III system for the first
time, you may wish to print a copy of this screen.
These alarm messages will be the messages that are in the emails
that are sent in the Alarm Type field that is selected on the various
different screens that have alarm fields in them.
3-100
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Secure the System
SECURE THE SYSTEM
This position on the Main Menu Screen is used for signing off after
you are finished using the system. To sign off, place the cursor over
“Secure the System” by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys,
and press <Enter>. This will cause the access level to return to zero
which allows the operator to “View Screens Only.”
The WCC III system has an automatic lock-out feature which
automatically monitors keyboard activity. If there has not been
any keyboard activity for a set period of time, the system will
automatically sign off and secure the system to a level zero access.
The amount of time which will cause the system to automatically
sign off is entered on the System Parameters Screen.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-101
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Energy Consumption Screen
ENERGY CONSUMPTION SCREEN
E N E R G Y
C O N S U M P T I O N
1
S U M M A R Y
08:29 1/30
Kansas City (On the Wall) System
Current Consumption Statistics
Satellite #:
24
Current Demand: 3 KW
Consumption since last reset: 0 KWH
Demand from: GA O
Description: Linux Consumption
Consumption:
Peak Demand:
Time of Peak:
Today
0 KWH
3 KW
10:20
Energy Consumption History
Yesterday
This Month
0 KWH
1200 KWH
3 KW
65 KW
00:01
00:01 01/01
Consumption Past 60 Days in KWH:
Last Month
4200 KWH
72 KW
00:01 12/01
Average over 0 in KWH
HOME for menu
The WCC III system has 50 Energy Consumption Screens.
The number directly under the ENERGY CONSUMPTION
SUMMARY title is the number of the screen. To change the
number, move the cursor to this field, enter the number you would
like, and then press <Enter>.
Kansas City (On the Wall) System
The same message that is entered on the System Parameter Screen
to identify the system is automatically printed on the Energy
Consumption Screen.
Time / Date
The present time and date will automatically appear at the upper
right corner of the screen.
Satellite #: 1
Enter the number of the satellite controller which has the pulse
type kw meter connected to it.
3-102
NOTE:
On a SAT III Controller, the pulse meter must be
connected to the analog input #1 on the satellite controller, and
the pulse switch on the front of the satellite controller must be
in the “On” position and a 5 VDC signal (from the Satellite’s
V-Out) must be connected to one side of the pulse meter
contact.
Current Demand and Consumption Since Last Reset:
The current demand and the current consumption since last reset
are automatically displayed here. To reset the consumption, select
<Action> from the Top Menu Bar and then select <Reset>.
The following units may be selected for consumption by placing
the cursor over the units for the “Consumption since last reset,”
pressing the <space bar> until the desired units appear, and then
pressing <Enter>:
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Energy Consumption Screen
KWH = 1 KWH
DKH = 10 KWH
HKH = 100 KWH
MWH = 1,000 KWH
DMH = 10,000 KWH
HMH = 100,000 KWH
GWH = 1,000,000 KWH
DGW = 10,000,000 KWH
5428 KWH will appear as 543 DKH
5428 KWH will appear as 54 HKH, etc.
The units selected will appear for the consumption since last reset
and also for the monthly consumption. The maximum value of
9999 for monthly consumption should be taken into consideration
when selecting units. The significant figures will be adjusted as
different choices are selected. For example, if you have a present
value of 5428 KWH, and you change the units from KWH to
HKH, 54 HKH will appear on the screen. If you then change back
to KWH, 5400 KWH will appear.
<Consumption> <Demand>
You may select either Consumption or Demand by placing the
cursor in this field, pressing the <space bar> until the desired
word appears and then pressing <Enter>.
<Past 60 Days> <Past 12 Months>
You may also choose to display the past 60 days of data or the past
12 months by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice
appears and then pressing <Enter>.
You may move the cursor down into the consumption or demand
table and manually enter the KWH demand for certain days or
months.
Demand From: GA 0
If you would like to average the kwh of the building using the
sliding window feature of the analog globals, enter the number of
the analog global which has the building kwh. If you want to read
the kwh from the satellite controller directly, enter GA0.
Energy Consumption History
The system will automatically show what the consumption (kwh)
and demand (KW) is for today, yesterday, this month, and last
month. The system will also show the time and date when the peak
occurred.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-103
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Energy Consumption Screen
3-104
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Energy Consumption Screen
SAT III CONTROLLER
(+)
KW
METER
TO HSS EXPANSION BOARDS.
UP TO TWO BINARY INPUT
BOARDS AND UP TO TWO
V-OUT RELAY BOARDS
MAY BE CONNECTED TO A
SAT III CONTROLLER.
(-)
ON OFF
SAT III Typical Wiring Diagram
Use the following Pulse Meter
E-Mon D-Mon Series 2000 with the P2 Pulser
Output Module option
Can only connect One Pulse Meter per SAT III.
BATT ON/ OFF
PULSE INPUT
OPTION 3
OPTION 2
OPTION 1
LOCAL SET DISABLE
LOCAL SET
TEST
L16
L15
L14
L13
L12
L11
L10
L9
SAT III Ain #1 jumper set for 0-5V input,
Vout #1 output voltage programmed for
constant 5 volt output. PULSE INPUT switch
"ON".
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
STATUS 1
STATUS 2
STATUS 3
ON OFF
L8
L7
L6
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
H
(-)
(-)
KW
METER
KW
METER
KW
METER
EACH CONTACT
IS RATED FOR
24VAC OR VDC
@ .5 AMP MAX
SAT ADDRESS
(+)
(+)
SAT 3P
CONTROLLER
(+)
24VAC
(-)
KW
METER
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BINARY
INPUTS
GND
(-)
ANALOG INPUT
JUMPER SELECTION
LOCAL SET
BINARY
INPUTS
ON OFF
SAT 3P Typical Wiring Diagram
Use the following Pulse Meter
E-Mon D-Mon Series 2000 with
P2 Pulser Output Module option.
Times eight Pulse Meters.
SAT III
HSS REC
HSS XMIT
ON OFF
0-15VDC
OUTPUT
MIN LOAD
IS 1K OHM
RESISTIVE
VDC ONLY
STATUS
SAT REC
SAT XMIT
SATIII-P
P1
0 TO 5V
INPUT
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
0 TO 10V
INPUT
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
THERMISTOR
INPUT
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
CURRENT
INPUT
A 4 TO 20 mA SENSOR WILL REQUIRE A
50 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR
A 1 VOLT INPUT, OR A 250 OHM LOAD
RESISTOR WHEN SET FOR A 5 VOLT INPUT.
A 2 WIRE ROOM SENSOR WILL REQUIRE
A 300 OHM LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET
FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT.
A 3 WIRE ROOM SENSOR WILL NOT
REQUIRE A LOAD RESISTOR WHEN SET
FOR A 1 VOLT INPUT.
WattMaster Controls Inc.
24VAC
FUSED
120VAC
GROUND
PULSE METER BOARD
ATTMASTER CONTROLS
YS102268 REV0
P2
(+)
0 TO 1V
INPUT
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
WARNING: OBSERVE POLARITY
BETWEEN THE SAT III CONTROLLER
AND THE SAT 3P CONTROLLER GROUND CONNECTIONS MUST BE THE
SAME.
24VAC
PULSE INPUTS
THERM
0 - 10V
0 - 5V
0 - 1V
TO OTHER
SAT III OR TO
WCC III - MCD
P3
MADE IN USA
P4
P5
(-)
KW
METER
P6
P7
(+)
GND
(-)
(-)
KW
METER
OPTIONS
SEL
(+)
PULSE 5
PULSE 6
PULSE 7
PULSE 8
STAT REC
STAT XMIT
LOCAL SET
STATUS
P8
GND
KW
METER
PULSE 1
PULSE 2
PULSE 3
PULSE 4
TOTAL WIRING FOR EACH INPUT NOT
TO EXCEED 100 FEET.
USE 18 GAUGE TWISTED PAIR WITH
SHIELD FOR EACH PULSE METER
CONNECTION.
CONNECT THE SHIELD WIRE TO GND.
TEST
LOCAL
L DIS
OPT 1
OPT 2
OPT 3
“P” MODE ADDRESSING NOTES
SAT III ADDRESSING STARTSAT
ADDRESS NUMBER 8.
EACH "P" MODE SAT III TAKES UP
(8) SAT III LOGICAL ADDRESSES.
THERE ARE ONLY (8) USED ACTIVE
INPUTS PER SAT 3P.
ANALOG INPUT #1 (PULSE INPUT #1)
ON EACH SAT III ADDRESS IS ACTIVE.
ALL OTHER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ON
THE SAT 3P ARE NOT FUNCTIONAL.
ADDRESS
POWER
(+)
ADD
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
120VAC WIRING IS BY OTHERS
THE VA RATING FOR THE SAT III IS 15 VA.
THE VA RATING FOR THE SAT 3C IS 10 VA.
THE VA RATING FOR THE SAT 3D IS 10 VA.
THE VA RATING FOR THE SAT 3P IS 3 VA.
COMM
24 VAC
R
GND
SH
T
(-)
KW
METER
(+)
WARNING: OBSERVE POLARITY
BETWEEN THE SAT 3P CONTROLLER
AND THE SAT III CONTROLLER GROUND CONNECTIONS MUST BE THE
SAME.
WCC III Technical Guide
TO OTHER SAT III CONTROLLERS,
SAT 3C CONTROLLERS, SAT 3D
CONTROLLERS, OR SAT 3P CONTROLLERS,
OR TO THE WCC III - MCD COMPUTER.
WIRE "R" TO "R", "T" TO "T", "SHLD" TO "SHD"
3-105
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Custom Screens
CUSTOM SCREENS
Custom Slide
1. ScrTest 1
2. ScrTest 2
3. ScrTest 3
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
Test 22
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
Test 43
Double click left button to start Slide Show Screen.
While in Slide Show Screen, hit [CtrlU] to toggle update.
Hit [Enter] to enter Edit Mode. Hit [Enter] to add a new logic address.
Hit [CtrlF] to find nearest logic address. Hit [CtrlD] to delete a logic address.
HOME for menu
The Custom Screen program allows you to capture custom text
screens and create actual dynamic values from points within the
WCC III system. Up to 60 screens can be created, and up to 100
points (temperatures, ON/OFF status etc.) can be placed on the
screen.
You first need to create a text file with a txt extension. We
recommend using Notepad. Notepad creates and edits text files
using basic text formatting. Notepad is located in the Accessories
folder that comes with your Windows program. To access Notepad,
click <Start>, <All Programs>, <Accessories>, <Notepad>.
The file you create needs to be saved or copied to the same
directory or sub-directory as the WCC III software. This is usually
C:\ProgramFiles\WCC III\wcc3.
3-106
Use the following procedure to cause the WCC III to read the file
from the Custom Screen Program.
Step 1: From the WCC III Main Menu, highlight <Custom
Screens> and press <Enter>.
Step 2: Type the name of the file without the “txt” extension
and press <Enter>. In our example, the word “ScrTest 1” would
be entered.
Step 3: The screen you created will appear in the Custom Slide
Screen. Press <Enter> to enter Edit Mode.
Step 4: Press <Enter> again to place the values of points within
the WCC III System on the screen. In other words, you can place
an analog value such as temperature or pressure or a binary value
such as fan status on the screen. Up to 100 values may be placed
on the screen.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Custom Screens
<Ctrl-U> Toggle Updating
The values of the WCC III points on the Custom Screen are
“dynamic.” That is, the values on the screen will change as the value
of the point changes. However, you have the option of “freezing”
the points at their present value by pressing <Ctrl> and <U> while
the Custom Screen is displayed on the monitor. To return to “live”
data, press <Ctrl> and <U> again.
Place Points on the Custom Screen
To place points on the Custom Screen, first access the Custom
Screen by typing in its name in one of the numbered fields. Pressing
<Enter> once allows you to move the cursor by using the arrow
keys. When the cursor is at the place where you want the point
value to be displayed, press <Enter> again, and the four slashes
(////) will appear on the screen. Then type the point designation and
press <Enter>. For example, if you want the value from satellite
#2 analog input #4, enter 2A4. Then press <Home>, and the point
value will appear on the screen.
Delete a Point Address on the Custom Screen
To delete a point on the Custom Screen, first you must have the
cursor in the exact location it was when the point was placed
on the screen. To simplify finding this location, you may move
the cursor near the existing point and then press <Ctrl> and <F>
simultaneously to cause the cursor to move to the exact position
where the point was created. You may delete the point by pressing
<Ctrl> and <D> simultaneously, and then pressing <Enter>. The
four slashes (////) will then appear. You may enter a new point, or to
remove the slashes, leave the screen by pressing <Home> twice,
and then re-access the screen.
Function of Keys While in Custom Screen
+ or PgUp
Step forward one slide
- or PgDn
Step backward one slide
Home or Esc or Ctrl+E
Exit screen
Ctrl+U
Toggle update
Enter
Enter edit logic address mode
Enter or Ins
Create logic address
Ctrl+D or Del
Delete logic address
Home or Esc
Press once to display point value
after entering logic address; Press
again to leave edit logic address
mode
+
Change color
Tab
Next logic address
Uploading and Downloading of User created Custom
Screens and BitMap Screens.
The WCC3.exe program version 2.27 and above has the ability to
additionally store the end user created Custom Screens and BitMap
Screens files on the WCC III – MCD. These stored files on the
WCC III – MCD now include the WCC3.exe generated Custom
Screens (Text Based) and BitMap screens (BMP pictures) and
the associated data files. By uploading or sending of files to the
WCC III – MCD, and by then by downloading or receiving files
from the WCC III – MCD, it is now possible to synchronize all of
these screens so that all of the WCC3 front end computer end users
can now see and then use all of these files. This makes for easier
distribution of the needed files for the WCC3 front end computer
end users to better create and then keep track of, or updating of
these WCC3 front end computer end user generated screen files.
When the WCC3 front end computer end user creates a simple
bitmap or custom text screen, these files are initially kept in the end
users Windows based computer under the following subdirectory
structure.
C:Program Files\WCCIII\JobName subdirectory.
(Please note that the JobName subdirectory is dependent on the
Job Name that the end user has named his jobsite on the WCC3.
exe “Access Job Site” menu on the initial Connection Dialog Box
when starting the WCC3.exe program.)
If there are more than one WCC3 front end computer end users
then this is the mechanism that should now be used to synchronize
all of the WCC3 front end computers end user created bitmap
screens and custom text screens.
These end user created bitmap screens or custom text screens are
now also can be kept in the SlideFiles subdirectory in the Backtask
subdirectory on the WCC III – MCD, if they are uploaded to the
WCC III – MCD, but please note that they are not part of the secure
nightly and monthly backup of the WCC III – MCD data that occur
automatically every night, and every month.
NOTE:
Do not use <Tab> when creating your text (.txt)
document.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-107
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Custom Screens
Located at the very bottom of the right hand portion of the WCC3
screen there is a status bar that displays the status of the various files
that are being uploaded or downloaded to the WCC III – MCD.
After selecting the “Download Slide Screen Files” which causes
the downloading of these files to the WCC3 user’s computer, you
must then exit the WCC3.exe program, and then restart the WCC3.
exe program to view these newly downloaded files.
You can also verify that the uploading and downloading of these
files has occurred with the System Event Log that is within the
WCCUtilities.exe program.
At the top of the WCC3.exe screen there is a pull down menu
under “File” selection that has these two new options to either
“Upload Slide Screen Files” or to “Download Slide Screen Files”.
You must have level 3 access to “Upload Slide Screen Files” or to
“Download Slide Screen Files” from the WCC III - MCD.
Important reminder:
“Upload Slide Screen Files” send files to the WCC III – MCD
from the WCC3 user computer.
“Download Slide Screen Files” receives files from the WCC III –
MCD that goes to the WCC3 user computer.
There is not an individual selection of bitmap screens or custom text
screens files for uploading or downloading. All of the associated
files for both the end user created bitmap screens (Up to 121 files)
and custom text screens (Up to 121 files) are either uploaded or
downloaded from the WCC III – MCD with this single pull down
menu selection of “Upload Slide Screen Files” or “Download
Slide Screen Files”.
3-108
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Bitmap Screens
BITMAP SCREENS
Bitmap Slide
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Bmptest
Bmptest
Bmptest
Bmptest
Bmptest
Bmptest
Bmptest
Bmptest
Bmptest
Bmptest
Bmptest
Bmptest
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
Test 27
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
Test 50
Double click left button to start Slide Show Screen.
While in Slide Show Screen, hit [CtrlU] to toggle update.
Hit [Enter] to enter Edit Mode. Hit [Enter] to add a new logic address.
Hit [CtrlF] to find nearest logic address. Hit [CtrlD] to delete a logic address.
HOME for menu
The Bitmap Screen program is available as part of the standard
software package.
The Bitmap Screen program allows you to capture graphic screens
that have been saved in a Windows bitmap format (BMP). The
actual dynamic value of points within the WCC III system can then
be placed on these screens. Up to 60 screens can be created, and
up to 100 points (temperatures, ON/OFF status, etc.) can be placed
on the screen.
WCC III Technical Guide
You first need to create a graphic file with a bmp extension. We
recommend using PC Paint. PC Paint creates and edits drawings
and displays and edits scanned photos. You can perform a print
screen and save it in Paint with a bmp extension. Paint is located
in the Accessories folder that comes with your Windows program.
To access Paint, click <Start>, <All Programs>, <Accessories>,
<Paint>.
The file you create needs to be saved or copied to the same
directory or sub-directory as the WCC III software. This is usually
C:\ProgramFiles\WCC III\wcc3.
3-109
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Bitmap Screens
Use the following procedure to cause the WCC III to read the file
from the Bitmap Screen Program.
Function of Keys While in Bitmap Screen
+ or PgUp
Step forward one slide
Step 1: From the WCC III Main Menu, highlight <Bitmap
- or PgDn
Step backward one slide
Screens> and press <Enter>.
Home or Esc or Ctrl+E
Exit screen
Step 2: Type the name of the file without the “bmp” extension
Ctrl+U
Toggle update
and press <Enter>. In our example, the word “Bmptest 1” would
be entered.
Enter
Enter edit logic address mode
Enter or Ins
Create logic address
Step 3: The screen you created will appear in the Bitmap Slide
Ctrl+D or Del
Delete logic address
Screen. Press <Enter> to enter Edit Mode.
Home or Esc
Press once to display point value after
entering logic address; Press again to
leave edit logic address mode
+
Change color
Tab
Next logic address
Step 4: Press <Enter> again to place the values of points within
the WCC III System on the screen. In other words, you can place
an analog value such as temperature or pressure or a binary value
such as fan status on the screen. Up to 100 values may be placed
on the screen.
<Ctrl-U> Toggle Updating
The values of the points on the Bitmap Slide Screen are “dynamic.”
That is, the values on the screen will change as the value of the
point changes. However, you have the option of “freezing” the
points at their present value by pressing <Ctrl> and <U> while
the Bitmap Slide Screen is displayed on the monitor. To return to
“live” data, press <Ctrl> and <U> again.
Place Points on the Bitmap Slide Screen
To place WCC III points on the Bitmap Slide Screen, first display
the desired bitmap image on the screen. Wait for the cursor to
appear in the upper left hand corner of the screen, and then press
<Enter> once to allow you to use the arrow keys to move the
cursor. When the cursor is at the place where you want the point
value to be displayed, press <Enter> again, and the four slashes
(////) will appear on the screen. Then, type the point designation
and press <Enter>. For example, if you want the value from
satellite #2 analog input #4, enter 2A4. Then press <Home>, and
the point value will appear on the screen.
Delete a Point Address on the Bitmap Slide Screen
To delete a point on the Bitmap Slide Screen, first you must have
the cursor in the exact location it was when the point was placed
on the screen. To simplify finding this location, you may move
the cursor near the existing point and then press <Ctrl> and <F>
simultaneously to cause the cursor to move to the exact position
where the point was created. You may delete the point by pressing
<Ctrl> and <D> simultaneously, and then pressing <Enter>. The
four slashes (////) will then appear. You may enter a new point, or
to remove the slashes, leave the screen by pressing <Home> twice,
and then re-access the screen.
3-110
Uploading and Downloading of User created Custom
Screens and BitMap Screens.
The WCC3.exe program version 2.27 and above has the ability to
additionally store the end user created Custom Screens and BitMap
Screens files on the WCC III – MCD. These stored files on the
WCC III – MCD now include the WCC3.exe generated Custom
Screens (Text Based) and BitMap screens (BMP pictures) and
the associated data files. By uploading or sending of files to the
WCC III – MCD, and by then by downloading or receiving files
from the WCC III – MCD, it is now possible to synchronize all of
these screens so that all of the WCC3 front end computer end users
can now see and then use all of these files. This makes for easier
distribution of the needed files for the WCC3 front end computer
end users to better create and then keep track of, or updating of
these WCC3 front end computer end user generated screen files.
When the WCC3 front end computer end user creates a simple
bitmap or custom text screen, these files are initially kept in the end
users Windows based computer under the following subdirectory
structure.
C:Program Files\WCCIII\JobName subdirectory.
(Please note that the JobName subdirectory is dependent on the
Job Name that the end user has named his jobsite on the WCC3.
exe “Access Job Site” menu on the initial Connection Dialog Box
when starting the WCC3.exe program.)
If there are more than one WCC3 front end computer end users
then this is the mechanism that should now be used to synchronize
all of the WCC3 front end computers end user created bitmap
screens and custom text screens.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Bitmap Screens
These end-user created bitmap screens can also be kept in the
SlideFiles subdirectory in the Backtask subdirectory on the WCC
III - MCD if they are uploaded to the WCC III - MCD, but please
note that they are not part of the secure nightly and monthly backup
of the WCC III - MCD data that occurs automatically every night
and every month.
Located at the very bottom of the right hand portion of the WCC3
screen there is a status bar that displays the status of the various files
that are being uploaded or downloaded to the WCC III – MCD.
After selecting the “Download Slide Screen Files” which causes
the downloading of these files to the WCC3 user’s computer, you
must then exit the WCC3.exe program, and then restart the WCC3.
exe program to view these newly downloaded files.
You can also verify that the uploading and downloading of these
files has occurred with the System Event Log that is within the
WCCUtilities.exe program.
At the top of the WCC3.exe screen there is a pull down menu
under “File” selection that has these two new options to either
“Upload Slide Screen Files” or to “Download Slide Screen Files”.
You must have level 3 access to “Upload Slide Screen Files” or to
“Download Slide Screen Files” from the WCC III - MCD.
Important reminder:
“Upload Slide Screen Files” send files to the WCC III – MCD
from the WCC3 user computer.
“Download Slide Screen Files” receives files from the WCC III –
MCD that goes to the WCC3 user computer.
There is not an individual selection of bitmap screens or custom text
screens files for uploading or downloading. All of the associated
files for both the end user created bitmap screens (Up to 121 files)
and custom text screens (Up to 121 files) are either uploaded or
downloaded from the WCC III – MCD with this single pull down
menu selection of “Upload Slide Screen Files” or “Download
Slide Screen Files”.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-111
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Network Information Screen
NETWORK INFORMATION SCREEN
Network Information
Internal Static IP Address:
External Static IP Address:
Subnet Mask:
Default Gateway:
Primary DNS:
Secondary DNS:
SMPT Outgoing e-mail Server:
SMPT Incoming e-mail Server:
e-mail address:
e-mail Password:
192.168.200.200
192.168.100.100
255.255.255.0
192.168.100.1
208.67.222.222
208.67.220.220
mail.wcc-controls.com
[email protected]
mcd@8500
Computer Name:
Domain Name:
Workgroup Name:
DSL/Cable Provider Name:
Telephone:
Account #:
User Name:
User Password:
Road Runner
Mechanical Contractor Name:
Telephone #:
Telephone #:
e-mail:
IT Contract Name:
Telephone #:
e-mail:
HOME for menu
Use the Network Information Screen to store important and
necessary information you might need to troubleshoot your system.
A Level 0 to 3 user can view this screen, but only a Level 4 user
can change any data. Please contact WattMaster Controls for this
password. All of the information on this screen is entered by the
installer of the WCC III system.
External Static IP Address
Address of the WCC III - MCD on the other side of the router.
Internal Static IP Address
Actual IP address of the WCC III - MCD.
3-112
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
PID Programs
PID PROGRAM
e(0):
PID program stands for Proportional-Integral-Derivative control.
e(1):
There are many ways to calculate the PID formula. This PID
program provides three ways to calculate the PID formula, the
Simple PID Mode, the Digital PID Mode, and the Modified PID
Mode.
Simple PID Mode
e(2):
Kp:
Ki:
Kd:
T:
The current error between the Setpoint and
Sampling value
The last 1st between the Setpoint and Sampling
input
The last 2nd error between the Setpoint and
Sampling value
The Proportional Gain
The Integrator Gain
The Derivative Gain
The sampling period (second)
The Simple PID Mode calculates the PID formula based on the
traditional PID equation as follows:
P(0)
I(0)
D(0)
U(0)
=
=
=
=
Kp * e(0);
I(1) + Ki * T * e(0);
Kd * ( e(0) - e(1) ) / T;
P(0) + I(0) + D(0)
Where:
U(0):
P(0):
I(0):
D(0):
e(0):
Kp:
The current calculated output value
The current Proportional output
The current Integrator output
The current Derivative output
The current error between the Setpoint and
Sampling value
The last Integrator output
The last error between the Setpoint and Sampling
value
The Proportional Gain
Ki:
Kd:
T:
The Integrator Gain
The Derivative Gain
The sampling period (second)
I(1):
e(1):
Digital PID Mode
The Digital PID Mode calculates the PID formula based on the
digitized PID equation as follows:
U(0) = U(2) + Kp*( e(0)-e(2) ) + Ki*( e(0) + e(1) )
* T + Kd * ( e(0) - 2e(1) + e(2) ) / T
Where:
U(0): The current calculated output value
U(2): The last 2nd calculated output value
WCC III Technical Guide
Modified PID Mode
The Modified PID Mode calculates the PID formula based on the
modified PID equation as follows:
P(0) = K * ( b * ys-y(0) )
I(0) = I(1) + K*h*e(0)/Ti + h* ( U(1) - v(1) )/Tt
D(0) = Td * D(1) / (Td+N*h) - K*N*Td * ( y(0) - y(1) )
/ (Td+N*h )
U(0) = P(0) + I(0) + D(0)
Where:
ys:
U(0) :
U(1) :
y(0):
y(1):
P(0):
I(0):
I(1):
D(0):
D(1):
e(0):
v(1):
K:
b:
Ti:
Tt:
Td:
N:
h:
The Setpoint
The current calculated output value
The last calculated output value
The current sampling value
The last sampling value
The current Proportional output
The current Integrator output
The last Integrator output
The current Derivative output
The last Derivative output
The current error between the Setpoint and
Sampling value
The last Winding amount
The Gain
The Proportional Fraction
The Integrator Time
The Reset Time
The Derivative Time
The Noise Factor
The sampling period (second)
3-113
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
PID Programs Screen - SIMPLE
SIMPLE PID PROGRAMS SCREEN
Program Number:
Activate By:
This specifies which PID program it is. There are a total 16 PID
programs.
Sampling Period:
This tells the PID program how to start. This has two parameters,
the Active Logic Address and the Active Choice. The Active
Choice can be <Only, Stop PID, Run PID>. If the <Only> choice
is chosen, the PID program starts to run if the value of the Active
Logic Address is 1. If the <Stop PID> choice is chosen, the PID
program will not run regardless of the Active Logic Address. If the
<Run PID> choice is chosen, the PID program will run regardless
of the Active Logic Address.
This tells the PID program how often to run this PID program.
Sampling period is based on seconds.
Current Active State:
Sampling From:
This shows the current Active By status which can be <On> or
<Off>.
This tells the PID program where to get the sampling from. This
has to be an analog logic address.
Output To Global Analog:
Description:
This gives a brief description of this program.
Current Sampling:
This shows the current sampling value from the logic address
specified by “Sampling From.”
Setpoint:
This tells the PID program the control target.
3-114
This tells the PID program where to send its calculated output
value. The PID program can only send its calculated output value
to Global Analog which has to be set to <External> mode in order
to receive value from the PID program.
Current Output:
This shows the current output value calculated by this PID
program.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
PID Programs Screen
PID Mode:
This tells the PID program to run one of the three supported
formulas.
Simple PID Mode
Proportional Gain:
Current State:
This defines the Proportional Gain of the simple PID formula.
This shows the current PID state which can be <Idle>, <Running>
or <Tuning>.
Integrator Gain:
This defines the Integrator Gain of the simple PID formula.
Maximum Output:
This limits the maximum output value this PID program can
produce.
Derivative Gain:
This defines the Derivative Gain of the simple PID formula.
Minimum Output:
Maximum Integrator Value:
This limits the Minimum output value this PID program can
produce.
This defines the absolute maximum the Integrator Value can be.
Default Output:
This tells the PID program the default output value when this PID
program is not activated.
RESET:
This commands the PID program to reset its state to <Idle>.
TUNING:
This commands the PID program to <Tuning> state.
USE TUNED DATA
This commands the PID program to use the tuned parameters as
the three PID parameters.
WCC III Technical Guide
Maximum Derivative Value:
This defines the absolute maximum the Derivative Value can be.
Current Proportional:
This shows the current Proportional portion of the output.
Current Integrator:
This shows the current Integral portion of the output.
Current Derivative:
This shows the current Derivative portion of the output.
Current Error:
This shows the current error between the Setpoint and Sampling
value.
3-115
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Modified PID Programs Screen
MODIFIED PID PROGRAMS SCREEN
Modified PID Mode
USE DEFAULT MODIFIER
Proportional Gain:
This commands the WCC3 to set the Proportional Setpoint Factor,
Anti-Winding Time, and Noise Factor to the default value.
This defines the Proportional Gain of the modified PID formula.
Integrator Time:
This defines the Integrator Time of the modified PID formula.
Derivative Time:
This defines the Derivative Time of the modified PID formula.
Maximum Integrator Value:
This defines the absolute maximum the Integrator Value can be.
Maximum Derivative Value:
This defines the absolute maximum the Derivative Value can be.
Proportional Setpoint Factor:
This defines the Proportional Setpoint Factor of the modified PID
formula.
Anti-Winding Time:
This defines the Anti-Winding Time of the modified PID formula.
Current Proportional:
This shows the current Proportional portion of the output.
Current Integrator:
This shows the current Integral portion of the output.
Current Derivative:
This shows the current Derivative portion of the output.
Current Output:
This shows the current output value.
Current Sampling:
This shows the current sampling value.
Current Output:
This shows the current calculated output value before the limit is
adjusted.
Noise Factor:
This defines the Noise Factor of the modified PID formula.
3-116
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Digital PID Programs Screen
DIGITAL PID PROGRAMS SCREEN
Digital PID Mode
Proportional Gain:
This defines the Proportional Gain of the digital PID formula.
Integrator Gain:
This defines the Integrator Gain of the digital PID formula.
Current Error:
This shows the current error between the Setpoint and Sampling
value.
Previous Error:
This shows the previous error between the Setpoint and Sampling
value.
Derivative Gain:
This defines the Derivative Gain of the digital PID formula.
Current Output:
This shows the current output value.
Previous Output:
This shows the previous output value.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-117
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
PID Tuning Screen
TUNING PID PROGRAMS SCREEN
The purpose of PID tuning is to find out the intrinsic characteristics
of the system—the Ultimate Gain and System Period—in order to
set the three PID parameters—Proportional Gain, Integrator Time,
and Derivative Time.
The tuning method used by this PID program is called Relay
Tuning.
Before the tuning can be started, the tuner must have some basic
knowledge of the system so that the tuning process will not throw
the system into an unstable state. The tuner must also know the
safety range of the output value and the estimated delay time of
system that can be obtained by observation of a simple experiment.
During the tuning, the system has to be kept stable without other
dynamic change. The tuner should know the physical output range
of the system, otherwise the tuning would have no meaning.
Output Delay:
This tells the PID program how much time is needed for the
sampling value to change after a change is made to the output.
3-118
Output Stable Time:
This tells the PID program how much time is needed for the
sampling value to become stable without a change being made to
the output.
Tuning Output Setpoint:
This tells the PID program what is the safe output value without
producing an uncomfortable result. This parameter can be set as
the middle of the safety range of the output value.
Source Setpoint:
This shows the sampling source value for the output value set to be
<Tuning Output Setpoint>.
Tuning Amplitude:
This tells the PID program how much change should be made to
the output value. This parameter can be set as five to ten percent of
the safety range of the output value.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
PID Tuning Screen
Source Stable Hysteresis:
Stable Time:
This tells the PID program how much range the source sample stays
in to consider the source sample as stable. For tuning temperature,
one degree is a good value.
This shows how long the sampling value has been considered
stable.
Source Crossing Hysteresis:
Period Time:
This shows the estimated period of the current tuning cycle.
This tells the PID program how much beyond the <Source
Setpoint> to be considered crossing the <Source Setpoint>
Tuning Direction:
Total Cycle:
This shows the direction of the tuning process. The direction can
be <Rise> or <Drop>.
This shows the number of tuning cycles that have occurred. At
least four cycles are needed to get enough tuning data to produce
reasonable PID parameters.
Output Timing:
Source Peak Value:
This shows the output is considered <In Delay> or <Not In
Delay>.
This shows the current peak value of the sampling source.
State Time:
This shows how long the tuning stage has been in its current state.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-119
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Week Schedule Summary Screen
Week Schedule Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is Wnn, where W = Week Schedule and nn = Week Schedule #
WEEK SCHEDULE SUMMARY SCREEN
Week Schedule Summary
Description
W1 : *Optimal Start*
W2 : Linux Week Schedule
W3 : Linux Week Schedule
W4 : Linux Week Schedule
W5 : Linux Week Schedule
W6 : Linux Week Schedule
W7 : Linux Week Schedule
W8 : Linux Week Schedule
W9 : Linux Week Schedule
W10: Linux Week Schedule
W11: Linux Week Schedule
W12: Linux Week Schedule
W13: Linux Week Schedule
W14: Linux Week Schedule
W15: Linux Week Schedule
W16: Linux Week Schedule
W17: Linux Week Schedule
W18: Linux Week Schedule
W19: Linux Week Schedule
W20: Linux Week Schedule
HOME for menu
W
1
State
DAY
DAY
DAY
DAY
DAY
DAY
DAY
DAY
DAY
DAY
DAY
DAY
DAY
DAY
DAY
DAY
DAY
DAY
DAY
DAY
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
S1
S22
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S18
S19
S20
S2
S42
S23
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
S31
S32
S33
S34
S35
S36
S37
S38
S39
S40
Time
Date
08:23
1/21
Used by Optimals
S3 S4
S5
S6
S62 S63
S43 S64
S44
S45
S46
S47
S48
S49
S50
S51
S52
S53
S54
S55
S56
S57
S58
S59
S60
Week Schedule Summary W_____
State
Specifies the number of the first week schedule to be displayed on
the Summary Screen. The system can display summary information
for 20 schedules at one time.
There are two messages which appear under this heading. The first
one is the On/Off message the user enters on the Week Schedule
Screen. The second message is the current status of the week
schedule.
To view or edit a specific week schedule, simply use the arrow
keys to position the cursor (shown as “>” along the left hand side
of the screen) to the desired point and press <Enter>. The week
schedule for the specified point will now appear.
Time Date
The present time and date will automatically appear at these
locations.
Description: ____________
The description message which was entered on the Week Schedule
Screen is displayed here to aid you in identifying the individual
week schedules within the system.
3-120
Used by Optimals
The optimal start programs within this system are based on
week schedules. That is to say, the optimal start programs will
automatically start the heating and air conditioning equipment at
the latest possible moment each morning and yet have the space at
the desired temperature level when a week schedule goes “ON.”
The optimal start programs within the system that are based on the
particular week schedule will be shown next to that week schedule.
There are 128 week schedules with up to 6 On/Off schedules per
day.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Week Schedule Screen
Week Schedule Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is Wnn, where W = Week Schedule and nn = Week Schedule #
WEEK SCHEDULE SCREEN
-------------Week Schedule 1------------Description: Linux Week Schedule
Current Status
DAY
ON
On Message #:
Off Message #:
7
8
DAY
NIGHT
WED 0824
Password level req’d to alter:
3
DAY
EVENT
EVENT
EVENT
EVENT
EVENT
EVENT
----------------------------------------------------------------------MON
On
0800
Off 1700
--------TUE
On
0800
Off 1700
------------------------------------------------------------------------------WED
On
0700
Off 1700
--------THUR
On
0700
Off 1700
------------------------------------------------------------------------------FRI
On
0700
Off 1700
--------SAT
On
1000
Off 1400
------------------------------------------------------------------------------SUN
Off
0000
----------HOL
Off
1000
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------HOME for menu
WEEK SCHEDULE _____
Specifies the number of the week schedule which you are currently
editing. If you would like to edit a different week schedule, simply
position the cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning
(arrow) keys, enter the desired week schedule number, and press
<Enter>. There are 128 week schedules within the WCC III system
to choose from.
Description: ______________
Specifies a short textual message which is displayed on Summary
and Data Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering points
within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control
codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allows).
Current status ______
Displays the current status (ON or OFF) of this week schedule and
current day of week, Mon to Sun and Holidays.
On Message #:___ Off Message #: ___
to a message on the On/Off Message Screen. The message is then
displayed in association with this week schedule.
Password level req’d. to alter: ____
Specifies the minimum priority level required by the system to
either allow you to make changes to the existing week schedule
or enter a new one. This priority level corresponds directly to the
priority level assigned each operator.
Event Entry
You may specify up to six events per day. Each event requires an
event type and time. The event time is in a 24-hour format, and the
event type is a choice list. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<OFF, ON, -- >
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Specifies a pair of message numbers, the first for the ON schedule and
the second for the OFF schedule state. These numbers correspond
WCC III Technical Guide
3-121
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Optimal Start Screen
Optimal Start Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is Snn, where S = Optimal Start and nn = Optimal Start #
OPTIMAL START SCREEN
Optimal Start # 7
ON
Time
Date
08:26
1/21
GA3
44.0 Deg F
Based on schedule:
W1
ON
Outdoor Sensor:
Description: Linux Optimal Start
Mode:
Locked
Indoor Sensor:
GA2
65.0 Deg F
Status:
Heat Start
Cooling Target: 74.0 Deg F
Reason:
Normal
Heating Target: 70.0 Deg F
Last start occurred at 07:35 on 11/21
Cold Soak Time Limit:
1440 Minutes
with Outdoor = 44.0 Deg F
Cold Soak Factor:
1.00
with Indoor
= 65.0 Deg F
Current Cold Soak Time: 0 Minutes
Last start completed Within normal tolerance
COOLING
HEATING
Outdoor
Advance
Outdoor
Advance
Advance time is measured in
reading
time
reading
time
in minutes/1.0 Deg F
---------------------------- --------difference between indoor
80.0 Deg F
20.00
55.0 Deg F
5.00
and target temperatures.
75.7 Deg F
18.00
45.7 Deg F
5.00
71.4 Deg F
16.00
36.4 Deg F
5.00
Minutes to be on: 0 Minute
67.1 Deg F
14.00
27.1 Deg F
5.00
Run time:
55 Minutes
62.8 Deg F
12.00
17.8 Deg F
14.00
Advance Time:
25 Minutes
58.5 Deg F
10.00
8.5 Deg F
16.00
Demand:
5.0 Deg F
54.2 Deg F
8.00
-0.7 Deg F
18.00
50.0 Deg F
6.00
-10.0 Deg F 20.00
HOME for menu
OPTIMAL START #_____
BASED ON SCHEDULE:
Specifies the number of the optimal start program you are currently
editing. The WCC III will accept up to 64 optimal start programs.
Specifies the time period for which the building is to be at the “ON”
schedule temperature. For example, if the user enters W1 (week
schedule #1), and W1 is “ON” from 8:00 am to 5:00 pm, then the
WCC III system will start the equipment early enough in the
morning to have the space temperature at the target temperature
when the occupants arrive at 8:00 am.
The optimal start programs are referred to as S1 to S64. If a piece
of equipment is to be optimally started, then Sn (n being a number
from 1 to 64) is used for the schedule on the Control Output Screen
for that piece of equipment. If the week schedule that the optimal
start program is based on is input as the schedule for the control
output, the control output will not operate based on the optimal
start schedule. The Sn designation must be used to utilize the
optimal start program. The Sn designation may be input directly in
the Control Output Screen or used in a binary global.
Description:
A short message is entered here which is displayed on the Optimal
Start Screens to help you remember points within the system. You
may enter up to 20 characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the
double quote character are not allowed).
Time / Date
The present time and date will automaticaly appear at these
location.
3-122
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Optimal Start Screen
OUTDOOR SENSOR
INDOOR SENSOR:
Specifies the location of the indoor and outdoor temperature
sensors to be used with this optimal start program. For example,
if the outdoor air temperature sensor is wired to analog input A3
on satellite number 1, 1A3 may be input for the outdoor air sensor.
Or, you may want to use a global analog which would allow you
to average or sort the temperature of several zones for the indoor
sensor.
Cool Start: Heat Start:
The Optimal Start program is in effect
at the moment and is either initiating a COOL START or a HEAT
START.
REASON:
Done On Time:
The space temperature was at target temperature
within 5 minutes of when the week schedule went on.
Done Early:
The space temperature was at target temperature
more than 5 minutes before the week schedule went on.
Done Late:
MODE:
Specifies the mode to be used. Because this is a choice field, the list
of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the page.
<Locked, Adaptive, Disabled>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then press
<Enter>.
The space temperature was at target temperature
more than 5 minutes after the week schedule went on.
COOLING TARGET: _____ °F
HEATING TARGET: _____ °F
Specifies the desired temperature to be maintained in the space by
the time the schedule associated with the optimal start goes on.
The system will use the advanced time variable specified by the
user and will not adjust these values.
The cooling target temperature MUST be greater than the heating
target temperature. Also, the cooling target temperature must be
greater than or equal to the ON schedule setpoint of the zone in
question, and the heating target temperature must be less than or
equal to the ON schedule setpoint of the zone in question.
Adaptive:
LAST START OCCURRED AT _____ ON _____
Locked:
The system will automatically adjust the advance start time based
on previous system performance. This allows the WCC III system
to “fine tune” the morning start time so your building is at the target
temperature when the schedule it has been assigned to goes ON.
Disabled:
The optimal start will be disabled when this choice has been
selected. The optimal start will have no effect and the value input
for the “based on schedule” category of this optimal start will
provide the on/off schedule for the equipment.
STATUS:
The Optimal Start Screen will automatically display one of the
four messages below:
Status: <OFF, ON SCHEDULE, COOL START, HEAT START>
The messages correspond with the following descriptions below:
Off:
The Optimal Start program is not in effect at the moment.
On Schedule:
The Optimal Start program is not in effect at the
moment, but the schedule which is assigned to the Optimal Start is
in the “ON” mode.
WCC III Technical Guide
The system will automatically fill in the time and date of the last
start. This permits the user to check the system during the day to
observe when the Optimal Start Program began.
A Change of State Trend Log may also be used to log the start and
stop time of the Optimal Start. To use the Change of State Trend
Log, record the change of state for Sn (n being a number from 1 to
64 which corresponds to the optimal start in question).
WITH OUTDOOR
AND INDOOR =
=
When the last start occurred, the Outdoor and Indoor temperatures
at the time of the start will automatically be recorded and displayed.
This will aid you in monitoring the Optimal Start Programs for
your system.
LAST START COMPLETED <REQUIRED MAJOR
ADJUSTMENT>
Locked Mode
The “required major adjustment” message will appear when
the Optimal Start Screen is in the “locked mode” if the space
temperature did not reach target temperature within 2 minutes of
when the week schedule for this screen went ON.
3-123
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Optimal Start Screen
Adaptive Mode
COOLING/HEATING ADVANCE TIME
The “required major adjustment” message will appear when
the Optimal Start Screen is in the “adaptive mode” if the target
temperature was not reached within the number of minutes
equal to the difference between the actual temperature and target
temperature when the optimal start began. That is, if there was
a 10 °F difference between the actual temperature and the target
temperature when the Optimal Start Program began, then the
“required major adjustment” message will appear if the space
temperature did not reach target temperature within 10 minutes of
when the week schedule went ON.
This is a user-entered field which corresponds with the Outdoor
reading. These values also correspond with the message to its right
which states:
There are 64 optimal start schedules. Each one has a heating target
and a cooling target.
LAST START COMPLETED <WITHIN NORMAL
TOLERANCE>
Locked Mode
The “within normal tolerance” message will appear when the
Optimal Start Screen is in the locked mode when the space
temperature reaches the target temperature within 2 minutes of
when the week schedule for this screen goes ON.
Adaptive Mode
The “within normal tolerance” message will appear when the
Optimal Start Screen is in the “adaptive mode” if the space
temperature reaches the target temperature within the number of
minutes equal to the difference between the actual temperature and
target temperature when the optimal start began. That is, if there
was a 10 °F difference between the actual temperature and the
target temperature when the Optimal Start Program began, then
the “within normal tolerance” message will appear if the space
temperature was at the target temperature within 10 minutes of
when the week schedule went ON.
COOLING/HEATING OUTDOOR READING
Enter two values under the outdoor reading heading—the top
value and the bottom value. The computer automatically fills in the
values between these two numbers at even increments. Usually,
the highest outdoor air temperature expected is input at the top,
and the lowest outdoor air temperature expected is input at the
bottom.
Advance time is measured in minutes/1.0 Deg F
difference between indoor and target
temperatures.
Minutes to be on:
0 Minute
Run Time:
0 Minute
Advance Time: 92 Minute
Demand:
5.0 Deg F
In the LOCKED mode, the system will always use these advance
start times. In the ADAPTIVE mode, the system will automatically
adjust these values based on previous system performance.
The Optimal Start Program reads the indoor temperature and
calculates how far it is away from the target temperature. It also
reads the outdoor temperature and then determines the start time
needed to bring the building to the target temperature. The largest
number which may be entered in this position is 99.99.
For example, assume the outdoor temperature is 45 ºF, the indoor
temperature is 65 ºF, and the indoor target temperature is 70 ºF.
Outdoor Temperature:
Indoor Temperature :
Target Temperature :
45 ºF
65 ºF
70 ºF
From the Advance Start Table, the advance start time is 12.11
minutes per ºF.
The difference between the indoor and target temperatures is
5 ºF.
Target Temperature:
Indoor Temperature:
Difference:
70 ºF
65 ºF
----------5 ºF
Therefore, the advance start time is 60.55 minutes.
12.11 x 5 = 60.55 MINUTES EARLY START
If you have selected the “adaptive” mode, and the space temperature
does not reach the target temperature when the schedule associated
with this optimal start program goes ON, the system will
automatically increase the advance start time. If the space reaches
the indoor target temperature before the schedule goes ON, then
the system will automatically reduce the advance start time.
3-124
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Globals
ANALOG GLOBALS
The WCC III system has 256 analog globals. The term “analog”
means a numerical value represented by a directly measurable
quantity such as temperature, pressure, etc. The term “global”
means information which is shared by all of the satellite controllers
in the system. Therefore, an “analog global” is a numerical value
which can be used by any satellite controller within the WCC III
system.
WCC III Logical Addressing
GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog, XXX = Global Analog
Address
A WCC III system has the capability of generating the value of the
analog globals by the following methods:
•
•
Averaging several numerical values
Sorting several numerical values to find the highest
number, lowest number, or any number in between
•
•
•
Calculating a “sliding window” average
Averaging one value over a period of time
Add data readings together to obtain an
accumulated total
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Math functions
Look up tables
External mode
Dual Valve
Proportion
Dual Ramp
Multi-Proportion
Pulse Start
WCC III Technical Guide
3-125
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Summary Screen
Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address
ANALOG GLOBAL SUMMARY SCREEN
ANALOG Global Summary
GA1 :
GA2 :
GA3 :
GA4 :
GA5 :
GA6 :
GA7 :
GA8 :
GA9 :
GA10:
GA11:
GA12:
GA13:
GA14:
GA15:
GA16:
GA17:
GA18:
Description
Linux Primary Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
GA
1
Value
55.0 Deg
65.0 Deg
44.0 Deg
55.0 Deg
66.0 Deg
55.0 Deg
55.0 Deg
55.0 Deg
55.0 Deg
1.0 Deg
999.9 Deg
55.0 Deg
55.0 Deg
55.0 Deg
99.0 Deg
55.0 Deg
55.0 Deg
55.0 Deg
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
Alarm
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
Time
8:38
Alarm Time
Limits
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
Date
1/21
15:40 01/16
15:40 01/16
15:40 01/16
ANALOG
Value
Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a
“choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the
bottom of the screen:
The present value of the global analog is displayed on the screen
at this location.
<ANALOG, BINARY>
To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired summary type has been selected and then
press <Enter>. (If you select a summary type that is different than
that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the
appropriate screen information.)
To view or edit a specific analog global, use the arrow keys to
position the cursor (shown as “>” along the left-hand side of the
screen) to the desired point and press <Enter>. The Analog Global
Screen for the specified point will now appear.
Time / Date
The present time and date will automatically appear at these
locations.
Description
Alarm Limits
Alarm Time
The alarm limits for the global analog are shown here along with
the time that the alarm occurred.
However, if a global alarm is active, the alarm class will appear on
the Main Menu after the “Active alarms in classes:” statement. The
alarm will also show on the Alarm Summary Screen.
Acknowledge Alarms
The global analog alarms are acknowledged from the Global
Analog Summary Screen by moving the cursor to the active alarm
and selecting <Action> from the Top Menu Bar and then selecting
<Acknowledge Alarm>. If the global analog value is within the
alarm limits, the alarm message will be cleared from the screen.
It can take up to 30 seconds before the alarm is cleared from the
screen.
The description message which was entered on the Analog Global
Screen is displayed here to aid you in identifying the different
analog globals within the screen.
3-126
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Screen
Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address
ANALOG GLOBAL SCREEN
ANALOG Global #: 20
Description:
Example
name is
Data Pattern:
Unit of Measure: 2
In Local Set this global defaults to LAST value.
Mode 4:
GA
20
xxx.x
Math Function
Global Value = 1a2
If this function cannot be calculated successfully, then use 65.0
-------------------------------------ALARM---------------------------------Range
Low Limit
High Limit
Type
Message #
Message
None
------0
0
Analog Global #:____
Data Pattern: _____
Specifies the global number and its type. Because this is a “choice”
field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom
of the screen:
Specifies the number of significant digits for analog global values
displayed by the system. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<ANALOG, BINARY>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired global type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>. (If you select a global type that is different than
that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the
appropriate screen information.)
<x,xxx,
xxx.x,
xx.xx,
x.xxx>
Units of Measure:
If you would like to edit a different global, simply position the
cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys,
entering the desired global number, and pressing <Enter>.
Specifies a message number to be used throughout the system to
reference a textual message which is displayed with the values
associated with this global. For example, if units of measure
message #4 is Deg F, and the units of measure message for the
specific analog global is degrees Fahrenheit, then the units of
measure would be 4.
name is ______
In Local Set this global defaults to
Specifies the name (point address) of this analog global. Any
changes to the global number will be reflected in this point address
(e.g., ANALOG GLOBAL #: 28 would show GA 28 as the
name).
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Description: ________________
Specifies a short message which is displayed on Summary and Data
Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering points within the
system. You may enter up to 20 characters (control, codes, ALT
codes, and the double quote character are not allowed).
WCC III Technical Guide
<LAST, FIXED>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired default choice has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
3-127
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Screen
The term local set means that communication is lost between
the MCD and the satellite controllers. If the MCD stops
communicating, the global analog values will be gone. This
input allows you to specify a default value for the global
analog if the MCD quits communicating. You may input a fixed
number, or you may choose to select LAST VALUE. If LAST
VALUE is chosen, the global analog will default to the value it
had when communications with the MCD were lost.
CAUTION:
Select the mode before entering any other data on
an Analog Global Screen. If other information is entered before
the mode is selected, there is a chance that the global analog
will not perform properly. If data has already been entered and
you want to change the mode, you must first clear the screen by
using the <Ctrl><Home> feature, and then exit to the Global
Analog Summary Screen before re-entering data.
Mode
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will
be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Averaged, Sorted, Integral, Math, Look Up,
External, Dual Valve, Proportion, Dual Ramp,
Multi-Proportion, Pulse Start>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode type has been selected, and then press
<Enter>. One of the following screens will appear, depending on
which choice you select:
Averaged List
Sorted List
Integral
Sliding Window
Average
Accumulation
3-128
Math Function
Look-Up Table
External
Dual Valve
Proportion
Dual Ramp
Multi-Proportion
Pulse Start
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Averaged List Screen
Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address
ANALOG GLOBAL - AVERAGED LIST
ANALOG GLOBAL #: _20
Description:
name is GA 20
Example
Data Pattern: xxx.x
Unit of Measure: 1
In Local Set this global defaults to LAST value.
Mode 1:
Value to be averaged
1A1
1A2
1A3
----
----
Averaged List
----
----
Substitute
72.000 for each unavailable value until more than 3
are available, then use
70.0 as the value for this global.
Range
None
Low Limit
----
HOME for menu
--------------- ALARM --------------High Limit
Type
Message #
---0
0
---values
Message
< Average, Sorted, Integra, Math fu, Lookup, External >
Mode 1: Averaged List
Value to be averaged
You may input up to 8 analog values to be averaged. The values
may be input in the form of 12A4 (analog input #4 on satellite
controller #12) or GA20 (global analog #20).
If a satellite controller that has an analog input used on this screen
stops communicating, then a value will be missing from the list.
The statement at the bottom of the screen allows you to specify a
default value for the missing values. However, if several inputs are
missing, you may default to a fixed value. Consider the following
example:
Substitute 72 for each unavailable value until more than 3 values
are unavailable, and then use 70 as the value for this global. If one
analog input on this screen is lost, then 72 will be substituted for
the lost value. If more than 3 analog input values are missing from
this screen, the value of the global will default to 70.
Range
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value
of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range.
If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of
the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is
selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is
outside the limits specified. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of
WCC III Technical Guide
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<None, Inside, Outside>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired data pattern has been selected, and then pressing
<Enter>.
Low Limit
High limit
The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value.
When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value
will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar>
until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>.
If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a
number which will serve as the alarm limit. If you select “Address,”
you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog
to be used as the alarm limit.
Type
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
Message #
Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference
a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen.
3-129
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Sorted List Screen
Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address
ANALOG GLOBAL - SORTED LIST
ANALOG Global #:__2
Description:
name is GA
Sorted
3
Data Pattern: xxx.x
Unit of Measure: 1
In Local Set this global defaults to LAST value of: 74
Mode 2:
Value to be sorted
1A2
1A3
1A4
1A5
1A6
Sorted List
----
----
----
List will be ordered from lowest of above values to highest.
Lowest element will be number 1. Highest will be number n.
Global value = sorted list element #:
3
If more than 0 values are unavailable
then use
0.0 as the value for this global.
Range
Inside
Low Limit
0.0
HOME for menu
---------------ALARM--------------High Limit
Type
Message #
0.0
0
0
< Average, Sorted, Integra, Math fu, Lookup, External >
Mode 2: Sorted List
1
---70
Values to be sorted
You may input up to 8 analog values to be sorted. The values
may be input in the form of 12A4 (analog input #4 on satellite
controller #12) or GA20 (global analog #20). The values of the
analog inputs on this screen will be sorted from the lowest to the
highest. For example, assume that the following analog inputs
have been entered on this screen as values to be sorted:
5A4
7A6
22A1
Message
13A3
_____ _____ _____ ____
Assume:
The value of analog input #4 on satellite #5 (5A4) =
The value of analog input #6 on satellite #7 (7A6) =
The value of analog input #1 on satellite #22 (22A1)
The value of analog input #3 on satellite #13 (13A3)
76 º F
72 º F
= 70 º F
= 74 º F
The system will order the values from the lowest to the highest
as shown below:
2
---72
3
---74
4
---76
You may designate the value of this global to be any of these four
values. Let’s assume that we want the value of this global to be the
next from the highest of the sorted values. Therefore we would
input a 3 for the sorted list element #.
Global value = sorted list element #: 3
The value of the global analog would be 74 in this example
since 74 is number 3 in the ordered list.
If a satellite controller which has an analog input used on this
screen stops communicating, a value will be missing from the
list. The statement at the bottom of the screen allows you to specify
a default value. If several inputs are missing, you may default to a
fixed value. Consider the following example:
If more than 3 values are unavailable, then use 74 as the value
for this global.
If more than 3 inputs are lost, the global will no longer sort the
list, but default to 74.
3-130
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Sorted List Screen and Integral Mode
Range
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value
of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range.
If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of
the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is
selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is
outside the limits specified. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<None, Inside, Outside>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired data pattern has been selected, and then pressing
<Enter>.
Low Limit
High limit
The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value.
When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value
will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar>
until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>.
If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a
number which will serve as the alarm limit. If you select “Address,”
you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog
to be used as the alarm limit.
Type
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
Message #
Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference
a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen.
ANALOG GLOBAL - INTEGRAL
MODE
Mode 3: Integral
The integral mode can be used to either determine the average
value of a measured variable using a “sliding window” effect or
the straight average for a given time period. The integral may also
be used to add data readings together to obtain an accumulated
total.
ACCUMULATION MODE
The integral mode may also be used to add data readings together
to obtain an accumulated total. For example, assume that the WCC
III system is monitoring the gallons per minute (gpm) of fuel oil
used by a building. We can use the integral mode to take a sample
gpm reading every minute and accumulate the readings to obtain
a total gallons used each day. For example, consider the following
table of data:
Time
(minutes since
midnight)
Sample Reading
(gpm)
Value of the
Global Analog (total
gallons)
1
5
5
2
6
11
3
5
16
4
4
20
1439
5
7200
At the end of the day, the total gallons used (7200 in the above
example) can be automatically written on a Trend Log Screen.
After the value is saved on a Trend Log Screen, the total gallons
used can be reset to 0 to allow the system to start accumulating the
next day’s oil usage.
The screen on the next page is a Global Analog Screen using the
accumulation mode to total the gallons of fuel oil used.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-131
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Integral Mode Accumulation Mode Screen
Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address
GLOBAL ANALOG - INTEGRAL MODE ACCUMULATION MODE SCREEN
ANALOG Global #:
Description:
Integral
32
Name is GA32
Data Pattern: xxx.x
Unit of Measure: 7 Gal
In Local Set this global defaults to LAST VALUE
Mode 3:
Sampling from : 1A2
Sampling rate:
1 Minutes
Mode: Accumulation
Global value =
Integral
Automatic Reset by ..... being ON
Window: 24 Hours
Divisor:
1
i = n
(  Di/n) / divisor
i = 1
If sampling data is unavailable, then use 50 as default value
Range
None
Low Limit
---------------Alarm--------------High Limit
Type
Message #
Message
Reset random data by pressing <Ctrl> <R> after editing.
HOME for menu
Sampling From:
The value of the global analog will be the accumulated total of this
input over the specified time period.
For example, if GA20 is input here, the system will periodically
read the value of analog global #20. The value of the global analog
will be the accumulated total of the readings over the specified
time period.
Automatically reset by GB1 being ON
This allows you to have the system automatically restart the
accumulation cycle when a binary value goes either ON or OFF.
Because this second field is a “choice” field, the list of available
choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Sampling Rate: 1 Minutes
Window: 24 Hours
Assume we are monitoring fuel oil usage in gpm, and 1 minute is
entered as the sampling rate and 24 hours is entered for the Window.
The system will read the value of the fuel oil usage rate (gpm)
every minute and then add the current value to the accumulated
total until 24 hours have elapsed. After 24 hours, the calculation
process will start over.
The sampling rate can vary from 1 minute to 99 hours. The window
will accept from 0-999 minutes, hours, days, or samples.
<OFF, ON>
3-132
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Integral Mode Accumulation Mode Screen
The sampling rate programmed amount of time can be in minutes
or hours. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available
choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Minutes, Hours>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired time frame has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
The sampling rate window can be programmed for number of
minutes, hours, days, or samples. Because this is a “choice” field,
the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the
screen:
<Minutes, Hours, Days, Samples>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired time frame has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Integral Mode: Accumulation
There are three integral modes which can be selected by pressing
the <space bar> until the desired choice appears and then pressing
<Enter>. The following choices are available:
< Accumulation, Average, Sliding Window >
Divisor: 1
Due to memory limitations within the WCC III system, the
maximum value of any global analog is 65,535, and the largest
number which can be displayed on the screen is 9999. The value
of the global analog is divided by this number to lower the number
shown on the screen. The maximum divisor allowed is 9999.
i=n
Global value =
(
 Di / n ) / divisor
i=1
This is simply the form of the math equation used to generate the
value of this global analog.
If sampling data is unavailable, use 50 as the default value.
If the input value is not available or invalid, then the value of this
global analog will default to this number.
WCC III Technical Guide
Range
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value
of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range.
If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of
the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is
selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is
outside the limits specified. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<None, Inside, Outside>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired data pattern has been selected, and then pressing
<Enter>.
Low Limit
High limit
The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value.
When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value
will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar>
until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>.
If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a
number which will serve as the alarm limit. If you select “Address,”
you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog
to be used as the alarm limit.
Type
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
Message #
Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference
a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen.
Reset random data by pressing Ctrl-R
After you enter data on this screen, or after you make any changes
to the screen, you should reset the data. You can do this in one of
two ways when the cursor is at the Home position of the screen.
You can press <Ctrl><R> or you can select <Action> from the Top
Menu Bar and then select <Reset>. You may also use the reset
feature whenever you want to cause the calculation process to start
over.
3-133
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Integral Mode Average Mode
ANALOG GLOBAL - INTEGRAL
MODE
AVERAGE MODE
The integral mode can be
used to obtain an average
value for a measured
variable over a given
time period. For example,
this can be used to obtain
the average outside air
temperature for a month.
The WCC III system
will take an outdoor air
temperature reading at
programmed time intervals,
for example, 1 reading
every minute. The value of
the analog global will be
the average temperature
for all of the readings
taken since this mode was
started. To understand
this mode better, think of the data as being in a “window” which
moves along the time axis and has all of the outside air temperature
readings in it since the beginning of the month. The value of the
analog global is the average of all the temperature readings that are
in the window. As the next temperature reading becomes available,
the window increases in size until the value of the analog global is
automatically cleared or erased at the beginning of the month.
3-134
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Integral Mode Average Mode Screen
Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address
GLOBAL ANALOG - INTEGRAL MODE
AVERAGE MODE SCREEN
ANALOG Global #:
Description:
30
AVG OA TEMP
Name is GA30
Data Pattern: x,xxx
Unit of Measure: 1 °F
In Local Set this global defaults to LAST VALUE
Mode 3:
Sampling from :
Sampling rate:
Mode: Average
Global value =
1A3
1 Minutes
Integral
Automatic Reset by GB1 being ON
Window: 33 days
Divisor:
1
i = n
(  (Di/n ) / divisor
i = 1
If sampling data is unavailable, then use 50 as default value
Range
None
Low Limit
---------------Alarm--------------High Limit
Type
Message #
Message
Reset random data by pressing Ctrl-R after editing.
HOME for menu
Sampling From:
The value of the global analog will be the average of this input over
the specified time period.
For example, if 1A3 is input here, the system will periodically read
the value of analog input #3 on satellite controller #1. The value
of the global analog will be the average of the readings over the
specified time period.
Automatically reset by GBXXX being ON
This allows you to have the system automatically restart the
averaging cycle when a global binary value goes either ON or
OFF.
Because this second field is a “choice” field, the list of available
choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<OFF, ON>
WCC III Technical Guide
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Sampling Rate: 1 Minutes
Window: 33 Days
Assume we are monitoring outside air temperature and 1 minute
is entered as the “sampling rate” and 33 days for the Window. The
system will read the value of the outside air temperature every
minute and then average the values until 33 days have elapsed.
After 33 days the calculation process will start over.
In the example above, GB1 goes on at the beginning of each new
month to restart the averaging process, so the end of the window is
never reached. If the end of the window is reached, the system will
restart the calculation process.
The sampling rate can vary from 1 minute to 99 hours. The window
will accept from 0-9999 minutes, hours, days, or samples.
3-135
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Integral Mode Average Mode Screen
The sampling rate programmed amount of time can be in minutes
or hours. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available
choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Minutes, Hours>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired time frame has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
The sampling rate window can be programmed for number of
minutes, hours, days, or samples. Because this is a “choice” field,
the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the
screen:
<Minutes, Hours, Days, Samples>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired time frame has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Integral Mode: Average
There are three integral modes which can be selected by pressing
the <space bar> until the desired choice appears and then pressing
<Enter>. The following choices are available:
< Accumulation, Average, Sliding Window >
Range
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value
of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range.
If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of
the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is
selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is
outside the limits specified. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<None, Inside, Outside>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired data pattern has been selected, and then pressing
<Enter>.
Low Limit
High limit
The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value.
When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value
will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar>
until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>.
If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a
number which will serve as the alarm limit. If you select “Address,”
you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog
to be used as the alarm limit.
Type
Divisor: 1
Due to memory limitations within the WCC III system, the
maximum value of any global analog is 65,535, and the largest
number which can be displayed on the screen is 9999. The value
of the global analog is divided by this number to lower the number
shown on the screen. The maximum divisor allowed is 9999.
i=n
Global value =
(
 Di / n ) / divisor
i=1
This is simply the form of the math equation used to generate the
value of this global analog.
If sampling data is unavailable, use 50 as the default value.
If the input value is not available or is invalid, the value of this
global analog will default to this number.
3-136
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
Message #
Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference
a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen.
Reset random data by pressing Ctrl-R
After you enter data on this screen, or after you make any changes
to the screen, you should reset the data. You can do this in one of
two ways when the cursor is at the Home position of the screen.
You can press <Ctrl><R> or you can select <Action> from the Top
Menu Bar and then select <Reset>. You may also use the reset
feature whenever you want to cause the calculation process to start
over.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Integral Mode Sliding Window Mode Screen
ANALOG GLOBAL - INTEGRAL
MODE
SLIDING WINDOW
Assume that we want to know
the average kW demand of a
building over a 30 minute time
period. The WCC III system
will take a kW reading at
programmed time intervals; for
example, 1 reading every three
minutes. The value of the analog
global will be the average kW
for the 10 most recent readings.
To understand this mode better,
think of the data as being in a
“window” which moves along
the time axis and has the 10
most recent kW readings in it.
The value of the analog global
is the average of the kW values
that are in the window. As the
next kW reading becomes
available, the oldest kW reading in the window drops off and is no
longer included in the data set which is used to determine the value
of the global analog.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-137
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Integral Mode Sliding Window Mode Screen
Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address
ANALOG GLOBAL - INTEGRAL MODE
SLIDING WINDOW MODE SCREEN
ANALOG Global #:
Description:
30
Name is GA30
Building kW
Data Pattern: x,xxx
Unit of Measure: 4 kW
In Local Set this global defaults to LAST value
Mode 3:
Sampling from : GA1
Sampling rate:
3 Minutes
Mode: Sliding Window
Integral
Automatic Reset by GB1 being ON
Window: 10 samples
Divisor:
1
i = n
Global value = (  Di/n) / divisor
i = 1
If sampling data is unavailable, then use 50 as default value
Range
None
Low Limit
---------------Alarm--------------High Limit
Type
Message #
Message
Reset random data by pressing Ctrl-R after editing.
HOME for Menu
Mode 3: Integral
Sampling From:
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
The value of the global analog will be the average of this input
using the sliding window averaging method.
Sampling Rate: 3 Minutes
For example, if 3A1 is input here, the system will periodically read
the value of analog input #1 on satellite controller #3. The value of
the global analog will be the average of several of the most recent
readings, depending on how other inputs on this screen are filled
out.
Assume we are monitoring building kW, and 3 minutes is entered
as the sampling rate, and 10 samples is entered for the Window.
The system will read the value of the building kW every 3 minutes
and then average the 10 most recent readings. The value of this
global analog will be the average kW for the last 30 minutes. The
maximum number of samples allowed is 11.
Automatically reset by GB1 being OFF
This allows you to have the system automatically restart the
averaging cycle when a binary value goes either ON or OFF.
Because this second field is a “choice” field, the list of available
choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<OFF, ON>
3-138
Window: 10 Samples
The sampling rate programmed amount of time can be in minutes
or hours. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available
choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Minutes, Hours>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired time frame has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Integral Mode Sliding Window Mode Screen
The sampling rate window can be programmed for number of
minutes, hours, days, or samples. Because this is a “choice” field,
the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the
screen:
<Minutes, Hours, Days, Samples>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired time frame has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Range
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value
of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range.
If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of
the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is
selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is
outside the limits specified. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<None, Inside, Outside>
Integral Mode: Sliding Window
There are three integral modes which can be selected by pressing
the <space bar> until the desired choice appears, and then pressing
<Enter>. The following choices are available:
< Accumulation, Average, Sliding Window >
Divisor: 1
Due to memory limitations within the WCC III system, the
maximum value of any global analog is 65,535, and the largest
number which can be displayed on the screen is 9999. The value
of the global analog is divided by this number to lower the number
shown on the screen. The maximum divisor allowed is 9999.
i=n
Global value = (  Di / n) / divisor
i=1
This is simply the form of the math equation used to generate the
value of this global analog.
If sampling data is unavailable, use 50 as the default value.
If the input value is not available or invalid, then the value of this
global analog will default to this number.
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired data pattern has been selected, and then pressing
<Enter>.
Low Limit
High limit
The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value.
When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value
will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar>
until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>.
If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a
number which will serve as the alarm limit. If you select “Address,”
you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog
to be used as the alarm limit.
Type
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
Message #
Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference
a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen.
Reset random data by pressing Ctrl-R
After you enter data on this screen, or after you make any changes
to the screen, you should reset the data. You can do this in one of
two ways when the cursor is at the Home position of the screen.
You can press <Ctrl><R> or you can select <Action> from the Top
Menu Bar and then select <Reset>. You may also use the reset
feature whenever you want to cause the calculation process to start
over.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-139
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Math Function Mode Screen
Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address
ANALOG GLOBAL - MATH FUNCTION MODE
The Math Function mode allows the WCC III system to perform mathematical functions using global analog values.
MATH FUNCTION SCREEN
ANALOG Global #:
33
Name is GA33
Description: Linux Global
Data Pattern: x,xxx
Unit of Measure: 6%
In Local Set this global defaults to LAST value
Mode 4:
Global Value = GA1
If this function cannot be calculated successfully, then use 50.0.
Range
Outside
Low Limit
25.0
---------------Alarm--------------High Limit
Type
Message #
75.0
1
6
Mode 4: Math Function
Math Function
Message
Temp Out of Range
Operator
Comment
Global Value = ((2A5-2A6)/(2A5-GA3))*100
Exponential
(ex)
exp(X)
Yields the value of “e” raised to the power
of the variable in parentheses
The math formula to be calculated is entered here. The WCC III
system has the following math functions:
Remainder
%
Yields the remainder when the value at
its left is divided by the value to its right
(integers only)
Arithmetic Functions
Operator
Add
+
Comment
Adds the value at its right to the value at
its left
Trigonometric Functions
Operator
Comment
Subtract
-
Subtracts the value at its right from the
value at its left
Sine
Multiply
*
Multiples the value at its right by the value
at its left
Cosine
cos(X)
Yields the cosine of the value in
parentheses
Divide
/
Divides the value at its left by the value at
its right
Tangent
tan(X)
Yields the tangent of the value in
parentheses
Square Root
sqrt(X)
Yields the square root of the value in the
parentheses
Arc-sine
asin(X)
Yields the arc-sine of the value in
parentheses
Log (Base
10)
log(X)
Yields the log of the value in the
parentheses
Arc-cosine
acos(X)
Yields the arc-cosine of the value in
parentheses
Arc-Tangent
atan(X)
Yields the arc-tangent of the value in
parentheses
Exponential
(Xy)
Natural Log
3-140
pow(X,Y) Yields the value of the first variable (X) raised
to the power of the second variable (Y)
1n(X)
sin(X)
Yields the sine of the value in
parentheses
Yields the natural log of the variable in the
parentheses
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Math Function Mode Screen
Relational Functions
Operator
Equal to
Comment
==
The combined expression is true if the value
to its left is equal to the value to its right; it is
false otherwise
Greater
Than
>
The combined expression is true if the value
to its left is greater than to the value to its
right; it is false otherwise
Greater
Than or
Equal to
=>
The combined expression is true if the value
to its left is greater than or equal to the value
to its right; it is false otherwise
Less
Than
<
The combined expression is true if the value
to its left is less than the value to its right; it is
false otherwise
Less
Than or
Equal to
=<
Unequal
=!
The combined expression is true if the value
to its left is less than or equal to the value to
its right; it is false otherwise
The combined expression is true if the value
to its left is not equal to the value on its right;
it is false otherwise
Logical Functions
Logical “or”
Operator
Comment
||
The combined expression is true if the
value to its left or the value to its right is
true; it is false otherwise
Logical “and”
&&
The combined expression is true if the
value to its left and the value to its right
is true; it is false otherwise
Logical “not”
!
The expression is true if the value to its
right is false, and vice versa
Miscellaneous Functions
Operator
Conditional
?:
Comment
The conditional operator takes 3
expressions arranged as follows:
(Return Air Temperature) - (Mixed Air Temperature)
% OA = --------------------------------------------------------------x 100
(Return Air Temperature - Outside Air Temperature)
Assume 2A5 (satellite controller #2, analog input #5) is the return
air temperature, 2A6 is the mixed air temperature, and GA3 is the
outside air temperature. The value of the global analog will be
percent outside air.
Global Value = ((2A5-2A6)/(2A5-GA3))*100
If the math function can’t be calculated successfully,
then use 20.
If the input value is not available or is invalid, then the value of this
global analog will default to the number entered here.
Range
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value
of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range.
If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of
the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is
selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is
outside the limits specified. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<None, Inside, Outside>
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired data pattern has been selected, and then pressing
<Enter>.
Low Limit
High limit
The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value.
When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value
will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar>
until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>.
If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a
number which will serve as the alarm limit. If you select “Address,”
you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog
to be used as the alarm limit.
expression1 ? expression2 : expression 3
Type
The conditional operator yields the
value of expression2 if expression1 is
true and yields the value of expression3
otherwise
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
As an example, assume that we want to calculate the percent
outside air using the following formula:
WCC III Technical Guide
Message #
Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference
a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen.
3-141
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Look Up Table Mode
Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address
ANALOG GLOBAL
LOOK UP TABLE MODE
Mode 5: Look Up Table
Eight of the global analog screens (GA121-128) have a “look up table” available. The look up table generates an output number based on
the value of an input number.
This mode is very useful for curve fitting applications. For example, consider a non-linear temperature sensor that has the characteristics
shown on the following graph:
1.0
Signal from Temperature Sensor (VDC)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
Actual Temperature (Deg F)
This graph can be reconstructed within the WCC III system with
the use of a look up table. For this example, assume that the 0-1
VDC signal from the sensor is connected to analog input 2A3
(Analog input #3 on satellite controller #2). The signal from the
sensor is the Analog Input for the look up table, and the actual
temperature is the value of global analog #121.
3-142
The data entered in the IN column must be in sequence with “1”
being the smallest and “60” the largest. If the input data is less than
the smallest value in the IN column, the smallest IN value on the
screen is used. If the input is greater than the largest IN value, the
largest IN value is used.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Look Up Table Mode Screen
Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address
ANALOG GLOBAL
LOOK UP TABLE SCREEN
ANALOG Global #:
Description:
Temperature
121
Name is GA121
Data Pattern: xxx.x
Unit of Measure: 1 °F
In Local Set this global defaults to LAST VALUE
Map From: 2A3
Extend Data to Next Table?: NO
Mode 5: Look Up Table
If the input data is unavailable, then use 70 as default value
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
1: 41 -> 41.5
16: 56 -> 59.5
31: 71 -> 68.0
2: 42 -> 42.5
17: 57 -> 60.3
32: 72 -> 68.5
3: 43 -> 44.5
18: 58 -> 61.0
33: 73 -> 69.0
4: 44 -> 46.5
19: 59 -> 61.5
34: 74 -> 69.5
5: 45 -> 47.5
20: 60 -> 62.0
35: 75 -> 70.0
6: 46 -> 49.0
21: 61 -> 62.5
36: 76 -> 70.6
7: 47 -> 51.5
22: 62 -> 63.0
37: 77 -> 71.3
8: 48 -> 51.8
23: 63 -> 63.5
38: 78 -> 72.0
9: 49 -> 53.0
24: 64 -> 64.0
39: 79 -> 72.5
10: 50 -> 54.0
25: 65 -> 64.8
40: 80 -> 73.0
11: 51 -> 55.0
26: 66 -> 65.5
41: 81 -> 74.0
12: 52 -> 56.3
27: 67 -> 66.0
42: 82 -> 74.5
13: 53 -> 57.0
28: 68 -> 66.3
43: 83 -> 75.3
14: 54 -> 58.0
29: 69 -> 67.0
44: 84 -> 76.0
15: 55 -> 59.0
30: 70 -> 67.3
45: 85 -> 77.0
IN
OUT
46: 86 -> 78.0
47: 87 -> 78.7
48: 88 -> 79.7
49: 89 -> 80.7
50: 90 -> 81.7
51: 91 -> 83.0
52: 92 -> 84.0
53: 93 -> 85.3
54: 94 -> 86.5
55: 95 -> 88.0
56: 96 -> 89.5
57: 97 -> 91.0
58: 98 -> 93.0
59: 99 -> 95.5
60: 100 -> 100.0
HOME for menu
Analog Global #:____
name is ______
Specifies the global number and its type. Because this is a “choice”
field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom
of the screen:
Specifies the name (point address) of this analog global. Any
changes to the global number will be reflected in this point address
(e.g., ANALOG GLOBAL #: 28 would show GA 28 as the
name).
<ANALOG, BINARY>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired global type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>. (If you select a global type that is different than
that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the
appropriate screen information.)
Description: ________________
Specifies a short message which is displayed on Summary and Data
Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering points within the
system. You may enter up to 20 characters (control, codes, ALT
codes, and the double quote character are not allowed).
If you would like to edit a different global, simply position the
cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys,
entering the desired global number, and pressing <Enter>.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-143
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Look Up Table Mode Screen
Data Pattern: _____
Map From:
Specifies the number of significant digits for analog global values
displayed by the system. Because this is a “choice” field, the list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Specifies an analog point address that acts as the input signal
source for the output valve.
<x,xxx,
xxx.x,
xx.xx,
x.xxx>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired default choice has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Units of Measure:
Specifies a message number to be used throughout the system to
reference a textual message which is displayed with the values
associated with this global. For example, if units of measure
message #4 is Deg F, and the units of measure message for the
specific analog global is degrees Fahrenheit, then the units of
measure would be 4.
In Local Set this global defaults to
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
< LAST, FIXED >
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired default choice has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
The term local set means that communication is lost between
the MCD and the satellite controllers. If the MCD stops
communicating, the global analog values will be gone. This
input allows you to specify a default value for the global
analog if the MCD quits communicating. You may input a fixed
number, or you may choose to select LAST VALUE. If LAST
VALUE is chosen, the global analog will default to the value it
had when communications with the MCD were lost.
Extend Data to next Table
Each look up table can hold up to 60 sets of data. If you have an
application which requires a larger look up table, the data may be
extended to the next look up table.
Mode
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will
be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Averaged, Sorted, Integral, Math, Look Up,
External, Dual Valve, Proportion, Dual Ramp,
Multi-Proportion, Pulse Start>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode type has been selected, and then press
<Enter>. One of the following screens will appear, depending on
which choice you select:
Averaged List
Sorted List
Integral
Sliding Window
Average
Accumulation
Math Function
Look-Up Table
External
Dual Valve
Proportion
Dual Ramp
Multi-Proportion
Pulse Start
CAUTION:
Select the mode before entering any other data on
an Analog Global Screen. If other information is entered before
the mode is selected, there is a chance that the global analog
will not perform properly. If data has already been entered and
you want to change the mode, you must first clear the screen by
using the <Ctrl><Home> feature, and then exit to the Global
Analog Summary Screen before re-entering data.
If the analog input is unavailable, then use 70.0 as a
default value.
If the input value is not available or invalid, then the value of this
global analog will default to this number.
3-144
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Look Up Table Graph
Graph <Action>, <Plot>
Each look up table has a graph associated with it which can be
displayed on the screen. To view the graph, select <Action> from
the Top Menu Bar, and then select <Plot>. The graph for GA121
is shown below:
WCC III Technical Guide
3-145
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global External Mode Screen
Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address
ANALOG GLOBAL
EXTERNAL MODE SCREEN
Mode 6: External
The Global Analog Mode 6 External Screen was created to generate
the analog value of the analog global depending on how a analog
value from an external function or program.
You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until
the desired data pattern has been selected, and then pressing
<Enter>.
Low Limit
High limit
Examples: The analog value from a global bridge which needs the
WCC Utility program running, the Dual Valve mode where this
global would control the second valve, or a external program that
is designed for the WCC system.
The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value.
When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value
will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar>
until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>.
Global Value ____ comes from external device.
If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a
number which will serve as the alarm limit. If you select “Address,”
you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog
to be used as the alarm limit.
This is the value that comes from the external device. You can
enter a number in this location but it will automatically default to
the value from the external device when you exit this screen.
Range
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value
of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range.
If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of
the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is
selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is
outside the limits specified. Because this is a “choice” field, a list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<None, Inside, Outside>
3-146
Type
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
Message #
Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference
a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Actuator/Valve Control
Useful Analog Actuator/Valve Control
Information
Manually or solenoid operated ball valves can be closed quickly,
and thus there is a danger of water hammer. Some ball valves
are equipped with an analog controlled actuator that may be then
motor operated. These valves can be used either for on/off or flow
control. A flow control valve may also be equipped with a feed
back potentiometer for additional feed back control.

In reduced port or more commonly known reduced
bore ball valves, flow through the valve is one pipe
size smaller than the valve’s pipe size, resulting in
flow area being smaller than the pipe. As the flow
discharge remains constant and is equal to area of
flow (A) times velocity (V), A1V1 = A2V2, the velocity
increases with reduced area of flow.

A V port ball valve has either a ‘v’ shaped ball or a
‘v’ shaped seat. This allows the orifice to be opened
and closed in a more controlled manner with a closer
to linear flow characteristic. When the valve is in
the closed position and opening is commenced, the
small end of the ‘v’ is opened first allowing stable
flow control during this stage. This type of design
requires a generally more robust construction due to
higher velocities of the fluids which might damage a
standard valve.

A trunnion ball valve has additional mechanical
anchoring of the ball at the top and the bottom,
suitable for larger and higher pressure valves (say,
above 10 cm and 40 bars).

Cavity filler Ball Valve—Many industries encounter
problem with residues in the ball valve. Where the
fluid is meant for human consumption, residues may
also be a health hazard, and when the fluid changes
from time to time, contamination of one fluid with
another may occur. Residues arise because in the
half open position of the ball valve a gap is created
between the ball bore and the body in which fluid can
be trapped. To avoid the fluid getting into this cavity,
the cavity has to be plugged, which can be done by
extending the valve seats in such a manner that they
are always in contact with the ball. This type of ball
valve is known as Cavity Filler Ball Valve.
It is important to realize that most analog controlled valves are
either controlled by a 0 to 10 volt or 2 to 10 volt control source
which then must correspond to an actual 0 to 90 degree opening or
closing of a typical quarter turn valve.
All analog valves have what is called a throttling range. This
analog valve throttling range is typically non linear and should be
thought of as the useful control range for the analog valve. This
range is typically rated at 20% to 80 % of the valves open position.
There is no useful flow until the valve is at 20% open, and for all
intensive purposes when the valve position is over 80% there is no
more useful flow increase either.
A ball valve is a valve with a spherical disc with a hole in it and
is the part of the valve which controls the flow through it. There
generally are three types of ball valves: Straight through, two way,
and three way ball valves. Three-way ball valves have an L- or
T-shaped hole through the middle of the valve.
There are five general body styles of duplex ball valves: single body,
three piece body, split body, top entry, and welded. The difference
is based on how the pieces of the valve—especially the casing that
contains the ball itself—are manufactured and assembled. The
valve operation is the same in each case.
In addition, there are different styles related to the bore of the ball
mechanism itself:

A full port or more commonly known full bore ball
valve has an over-sized ball so that the hole in the
ball is the same size as the pipeline resulting in lower
friction loss. Flow is unrestricted but the valve is
larger and more expensive, so this is only used where
free flow is required, for example, in pipelines which
require pigging.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-147
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Dual Valve Mode
Dual Valve Mode
Dual Valve is used when two valves are used to control one output
with parallel connection. Normally, one valve is a larger valve and
the other valve is a small valve.
The control input has to be from 0 to 100 with unit %. The valve
size also is based on combined units %. The valve size of both
valves should add up to 100 %. The Global Analog Dual Valve
mode has three stages:
During Stage 1, when the monitored analog input exceeds the
Stage 1 Stage Up setpoint, the internal stage timer starts to run.
When the internal stage timer exceeds Stage Time, the stage
changes to Stage 2. The stage timer resets to zero when the
monitored analog input is less than the Stage 1 Stage Up setpoint.
The Dual Valve mode has 5 staging setpoints:
During Stage 2, when the monitored analog input exceeds
the Stage 2 Stage Up setpoint, the internal stage timer starts
to run. When the internal stage timer exceeds the Stage Time,
the stage changes to Stage 3. Or when the monitored analog
input drops below Stage 2 Stage Down setpoint, the internal
stage timer starts to run. When the internal stage timer exceeds
the Stage Time, the stage changes to Stage 1. The stage timer
resets to zero when the monitored analog input is between
Stage 2 Stage Down setpoint and Stage 2 Stage Up setpoint.
Stage 1 Stage Up setpoint
Stage 2 Stage Up setpoint
Stage 2 Stage Down setpoint
Stage 3 Stage Down setpoint
Stage Time
During Stage 3, when the monitored analog input drops below
the Stage 3 Stage Down setpoint, the internal stage timer starts
to run. When the internal stage timer exceeds the Stage Time, the
stage changes to Stage 2. The stage timer resets to zero when the
monitored analog input is above the Stage 3 Stage Down setpoint.
Stage Time is an internal stage timer counter for deciding whether
to stage to/back next/previous stage. The timer will start to run
when the condition is met, exceeding or dropping below the xx%.
The timer resets when the condition disappears. If the stage timer
exceeds the Stage Time, the Stage changes to next/previous stage.
Since Dual Valve Mode has two outputs, the next very global
analog has to be set to EXTERNAL mode for this Dual Valve
operation to work.
Stage 1: Valve 1 is modulating and Valve 2 is closed.
Stage 2: Valve 1 is closed and Valve 2 is modulating.
Stage 3: Valve 1 is full open and Valve 2 is modulating.
3-148
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Dual Valve Mode
Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address
ANALOG GLOBAL - DUAL VALVE MODE
Mode 7: Dual Valve
Control Input from:
The Global Analog Mode 7 Dual Valve Screen was created to
control two valves or two VFD controlled pumps (a primary and
secondary) from one analog control point. It is not the same type of
control as Lead/Lag control.
In this field, a valid WCC III analog structured value must be used
as an analog input value for this screen to operate correctly. Satellite
Analog Input (XXXAY), Satellite Data Register “a”( XXXRYa),
Satellite Data Register “b”(XXXRYb), Satellite Analog Output
(XXXPY), Global Analog (GAZZZ), where XXX equals 1 to 239,
Y equals 1 to 8, and ZZZ equals 1 to 256.
NOTE:
The very next Global Analog is the 2nd global analog
value for Valve 2 and must be set to Global Analog Mode 6:
External for proper operation.
NOTE:
The Data Pattern for both these globals need to be set
up as XXX.X.
NOTE:
This input needs to be set up as a 000.0 to 100.0
(XXX.X) input, this is needed to represent 0 – 100%.
Stage time:
Stage time is the interval time for an internal stage timer counter
that is used for deciding whether to stage to/ back to / next /previous
stage. This Stage time is in Seconds.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-149
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Dual Valve Mode
Valve 1 size:
One Valve/Pump flow size ratio may be a different size from the
other. Example: An 6 inch pipe verse a 8 inch pipe—the total flow
rate ratio would be 25% for valve 1 and 75% for valve 2. Both of
the Valve sizes must add up to be 100%.
V1 Fail – Modulate Valve 2, the proof of flow from Valve 1 has
failed so Valve 1 opens to 50.0% and Valve 2 modulates.
V2 Fail – Modulate Valve 1, the proof of flow from Valve 2 has
failed so Valve 2 opens to 50.0% and Valve 1 modulates.
Configuration:
NOTE: Valve 1 should always be the smaller of the 2 valves.
Valve 2 size:
One Valve/Pump flow size ratio may be different size from the
other. Example: An 6 inch pipe verse a 8 inch pipe—the total flow
rate ratio would be 25% for valve 1 and 75% for valve 2. Both of
the Valve sizes must add up to be 100%.
NOTE: Valve 1 should always be the smaller of the 2 valves.
Valve 1 proof of flow from:
This field must have a valid WCC III binary input value and is
used as a feedback mechanism to ensure that the valve/pump has
actually turned on and is working properly. The proof of flow is
checked when the valve opening is greater than 10.0%. There is a
2 minute proof of flow delay, if after 2 minutes there is no proof of
flow (and Valve 1 is open more than 10.0%), valve 1 will open to
50.0% and valve 2 will modulate. If the proof of flow is fixed and
re-detected, the valve will return to normal operation.
Valve 2 proof of flow from:
This field must have a valid WCC III binary input value and is
used as a feedback mechanism to ensure that the valve/pump has
actually turned on and is working properly. The proof of flow is
checked when the valve opening is greater than 10.0%. There is a
2 minute proof of flow delay, if after 2 minutes there is no proof of
flow (and Valve 2 is open more than 10.0%), valve 2 will open to
50.0% and valve 1 will modulate. If the proof of flow is fixed and
re-detected, the valve will return to normal operation.
Current State:
This field displays the current state of the Dual Valves, and will be
listed as Modulate Valve 1, Modulate Valve 2, V1 Open - Modulate
V2, V1 Fail - Modulate V2, or V2 Fail - Modulate V1.
This field displays the current condition of this global, it displays
whether it is set up correctly or not. It will display either Normal,
Next GA non-extern, Bad V2 Dn Threshold, BadV12 Dn
Threshold, or Bad Valve Size.
Normal – Everything is basically set up OK.
Bad V2 Dn Threshold – the control input percentage for Valve 2
to close is greater than the control input percentage for Valve 2 to
open. The percentage for Valve 2 to open should be more than the
percentage for Valve 2 to close.
Bad V12 Dn Threshold – the control input percentage for Valve
1 to close and Valve 2 to continue to modulate is greater than
the control input percentage for Valve 1 to open and Valve 2 to
continue to modulate. The percentage for Valve 1 to close and
Valve 2 to continue to modulate should be less than the percentage
for Valve 1 to open and Valve 2 to continue to modulate.
Bad Valve Size – Valve 2 size is greater than Valve 1. One Valve/
Pump flow size ratio may be a different size from the other.
Example: An 6 inch pipe verse a 8 inch pipe—the total flow rate
ratio would be 25% for valve 1 and 75% for valve 2. Both of the
Valve sizes must add up to be 100%. Valve 1 should always be the
smaller of the 2 valves.
Next GA non-extern – this means the next global analog is not
EXTERNAL mode. The Dual Valve mode has two outputs. The
next global analog has to be set to EXTERNAL mode for this
mode to run.
Modulation starts with Valve 1.
During Valve 1 modulation,
If the control input exceeds _____ % for more
than stage time, Valve 1 will close and Valve
2 will modulate.
This user input is a percentage, 0 – 100, for if the control input rises
above this value for longer than the amount of stage time, then
Valve 1 will close and Valve 2 will start modulating.
Modulate Valve 1, Valve 1 is modulating and Valve 2 is closed.
Modulate Valve 2, Valve 2 is modulating and Valve 1 is closed.
V1 Open – Modulate Valve 2, Valve 1 is fully open and Valve 2 is
modulating.
3-150
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Dual Valve Mode
During Valve 2 modulation,
If the control input drops below _____ % for
more than stage time, Valve 2 will close and
Valve 1 will modulate.
This user input is a percentage, 0 – 100 (but less than the percent
where Valve 1 closed and Valve 2 started), for if the control input
drops below this value for longer than the amount of stage time,
then Valve 2 will close and Valve 1 will start Modulating.
If the control input exceeds _____ % for more
than stage time, Valve 1 will full open and
Valve 2 continue modulate.
This user input is a percentage, 0 – 100, for if the control input rises
above this value for longer than the amount of stage time, then
Valve 1 will fully open and Valve 2 will modulate.
During Valve 1 full open with valve 2 modulation,
If the control input drops below _____ % for
more than stage time, Valve 1 will close and
Valve 2 continue modulate.
This user input is a percentage, 0 – 100 (but less than the percent
where Valve 1 fully opened and Valve 2 was modulating), for if
the control input drops below this value for longer than the amount
of stage time, then Valve 1 will close and Valve 2 will continue to
modulate.
Low Limit High limit
The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value.
When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value
will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar>
until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>.
If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a
number which will serve as the alarm limit.
If you select “Address,” you can specify an address such as an
analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit.
Type
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
Message #
Specifies a message number which is used by the system to
reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message
Screen.
Range
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value
of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range.
If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of
the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is
selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is
outside of the limits specified.
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<None, Inside, Outside>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired
data pattern has been selected and then press <Enter>.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-151
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Proportional Mode Screen
Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address
ANALOG GLOBAL - PROPORTION MODE
Mode 8: Proportion
The Global Analog Mode 8 Proportion Screen was created to
proportionally adjust a non linear analog value to a linear analog
value. This is generally used to straighten the analog curve of a
non linear device to a much truer linear curve. There are only two
“correction” points that are utilized on this screen and they are a
“starting point” and an “end point” for this simple linearization
process. If more than two “correction” points are required, then
use the Global Analog Mode 10 Multi-Proportion Screen.
As value from ______ varies from _____ to ______
adjust the global from ______to______.
A valid WCC III analog structured value must be used as an
analog input value for this screen to operate correctly. Satellite
Analog Input (XXXAY), Satellite Data Register “a”( XXXRYa),
Satellite Data Register “b”(XXXRYb), Satellite Analog Output
(XXXPY), Global Analog (GAZZZ), where XXX equals 1 to
239, Y equals 1 to 8, and ZZZ equals 1 to 256.
Examples:
As value from 1A1 varies from 45 to 75
adjust the global from 0 to 100.
This changes or narrows the scaling range of sensor 1a1 from 45
to 75 to 0 to 100. This new scaling factor is this Global Analog’s
value.
As value from 1A1 varies from 0 to 500
adjust the global from 0 to 10.
This changes or narrows the scaling range of sensor 1a1 from 0
to 500 to 0 to 10. This new scaling factor is this Global Analog’s
value.
Entering a value in this blank will allow this global analog to
proportionally adjust a non linear analog value to a linear analog
value. A starting value and an ending value is also required for both
sides for this proportional adjustment to function.
3-152
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Proportional Mode Screen
Range
Type
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value
of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range.
If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of
the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is
selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is
outside the limits specified.
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Message #
Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference
a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen.
<None, Inside, Outside>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired
data pattern has been selected and then press <Enter>.
Low Limit High limit
The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value.
When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value
will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar>
until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>.
If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a
number which will serve as the alarm limit.
If you select “Address,” you can specify an address such as an
analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-153
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Dual Ramp Mode Screen
Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address
ANALOG GLOBAL - DUAL RAMP MODE
Mode 9: Dual Ramp
The Global Analog Mode 9 Dual Ramp Screen was created to
help emulate the old WattMaster PI board in software. It basically
uses the control set points of two control outputs on a satellite
controller to control a single analog output on a satellite controller
and should be used when controlling an analog actuator or VFD
that needs to have an analog control setpoint.
Ramp Up:
This is the Analog Value (usually thought of as a upper end value
of 100 that corresponds to 100%) that should go up in value when
the “Control From” binary value is “ON” and is then gradually
increased in value based upon the user programmable “Time”
value in seconds.
Ramp Down:
NOTE: When both the Ramp Up and Ramp Down “Control
From” binary control values are both “ON” then the global
analog value will stop incrementing or decrementing in value.
Control From:
This is a binary “ON” or “OFF” value such as would come from
a satellite’s control output or binary output. This satellite’s control
output screens will also need to be set up for proper control of the
control outputs.
Limit:
A high and low limit control point’s values should be entered
here—a value of 0 to 100% that will corresponds to the position of
a valve or the speed of a VFD controller.
This is the Analog Value (usually thought of as a lower end value
of 0 that corresponds to 0%) that should go down in value when
the “Control From” binary value is “ON” and is then gradually
decreased in value based upon the user programmable “Time”
value in seconds.
3-154
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Dual Ramp Mode Screen
Time:
Low Limit High limit
There are two time values that should be set here—time in seconds
for the Ramp Up time to increase in value and Ramp Down time to
decrease in value. These two Ramp Up/Ramp Down time values
can be set independently so that one value may ramp up or down
faster. 600 seconds equals 10 minutes. This Global Analog value
should then be fed back into the Satellite controller’s analog output
to actually control the actuator or VFD with a 0 to 10 Volt or a 2 to
10 Volt signal.
The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value.
When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value
will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar>
until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>.
Range
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value
of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range.
If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of
the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is
selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is
outside the limits specified.
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<None, Inside, Outside>
If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a
number which will serve as the alarm limit.
If you select “Address,” you can specify an address such as an
analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit.
Type
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
Message #
Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference
a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen.
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired
data pattern has been selected and then press <Enter>.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-155
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Multi-Proportion Mode Screen
Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address
ANALOG GLOBAL - MULTI-PROPORTION MODE
Mode 10: Multi-Proportion
Examples:
The Global Analog Mode 10 Multi-Proportion Screen was created
to proportionally adjust a non linear Analog value to a linear analog
value. This is generally used to straighten the analog curve of a
non linear device to a much truer analog linear curve. There are
six “correction” points that are utilized on this screen and they are
a “starting point” with four middle points and an “end point” for
this multiple linearization process. All six of the correction points
must be filled out appropriately. If only two simple “correction”
points are required, then use the Global Analog Mode Proportion
Screen.
As value from 1A1 varies from 45 adjust the global to 0
55
30
60
45
65
60
70
75
75
90
As value from _ _ _ _ varies from _ _ _ _ adjust the
global to _ _ _ _.
As value from 1A1 varies from
A valid WCC III analog structured value must be used as an analog
input value for this screen to operate correctly. Satellite Analog
Input (XXXAY), Satellite Data Register “a”( XXXRYa), Satellite
Data Register “b”(XXXRYb), Satellite Analog Output (XXXPY),
Global Analog (GAZZZ), where XXX equals 1 to 239, Y equals 1
to 8, and ZZZ equals 1 to 256.
Entering a value in this blank will allow this global analog to
proportionally adjust a non linear analog value to a linear analog
value. A starting value, 4 middle values, and an ending value are
also required for both sides for this proportional adjustment to
function.
3-156
This changes or narrows the scaling range of sensor 1a1 from 45
to 75 to 0 to 90. This new scaling factor is this Global Analog’s
value.
0 adjust the global to
100
200
300
400
500
0
30
45
60
75
90
This changes or narrows the scaling range of sensor 1a1 from 0
to 500 to 0 to 90. This new scaling factor is this Global Analog’s
value.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Multi-Proportion Mode Screen
Range
Type
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value
of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range.
If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of
the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is
selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is
outside the limits specified.
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<None, Inside, Outside>
Message #
Specifies a message number which is used by the system to reference
a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen.
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired
data pattern has been selected and then press <Enter>.
Low Limit High limit
The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value.
When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value
will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar>
until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>.
If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a
number which will serve as the alarm limit.
If you select “Address,” you can specify an address such as an
analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-157
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Pulse Start Mode Screen
Analog Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GAXXX, where GA = Global Analog and XXX = Global Analog Address
ANALOG GLOBAL - PULSE START MODE
Mode 11: Pulse Start
The Global Analog Mode 11 Pulse Start Screen was created for
opening and closing of a “sticky” valve control. Example: If you
have a valve that does not act the same way opening as it does
closing, then you may want to use this mode.
Pulse Start Mode
Pulse Start mode is used when the equipment needs an initial push
to start to run. For example, some fans (inverter controlled) will not
want start to run without initial high push voltage.
The Pulse Start mode has two setup voltages—the push
voltage/close voltage and pulse time. The push voltage is
the required voltage to start the equipment. The pulse time,
is the time in seconds that is required to start the equipment.
The close voltage is the required voltage to close the equipment.
The close voltage must to be less than the push voltage.
As value from _____ starts above _____
sets this global to _____ for _____ Seconds.
A valid WCC III analog structured value must be used as an analog
input value for this screen to operate correctly. Satellite Analog
Input (XXXAY), Satellite Data Register “a”( XXXRYa), Satellite
Data Register “b”(XXXRYb), Satellite Analog Output (XXXPY),
Global Analog (GAZZZ), where XXX equals 1 to 239, Y equals
1 to 8, and ZZZ equals 1 to 256.
Example:
As value from 1A1 starts above 1.0
sets this global to 2.5 for 15 seconds.
As value from Satellite #1, Analog input #1 rises above 1.0
volts, this global will be set to 2.5 volts for 15 seconds then this
global value will follow the analog input value until it drops
below 1.5 volts.
For example, the equipment’s push voltage is 2 volts, close voltage
is 0.5 volts and pulse time is 2 minutes. When the monitored analog
input is less than 0.5 volts, this output will be 0 volts. When the
monitored analog input changes to 0.6 volt, this output start pulse
will push the equipment by output 2 volts for 2 minutes. After 2
minutes, this output will follow the monitored analog input to 0.6
volts. When the monitored analog input drops below 0.5 volts, this
output will set to 0 volts and considered closed.
3-158
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Analog Global Pulse Start Mode Screen
As the source value drops below _______,
sets this global to ______.
Otherwise, this global value will follow the source
value.
Low Limit High limit
Example:
The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value.
When you move the cursor to this field, the word Address or Value
will appear. Since this is a choice field, press the <Space Bar>
until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>.
As the source value drops below 1.5
set this global to 0.0
If you select “Value” as the choice for this field, you can enter a
number which will serve as the alarm limit.
As the source value from Satellite #1, Analog Input #1 drops below
1.5 volts, this global will be set to 0.0 volts.
If you select “Address,” you can specify an address such as an
analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit.
Range
Type
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value
of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range.
If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of
the global analog is within the two limits specified. If outside is
selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is
outside the limits specified.
Specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
Because this is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<None, Inside, Outside>
Message #
Specifies a message number which is used by the system to
reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message
Screen.
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired
data pattern has been selected and then press <Enter>.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-159
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global Summary Screen
Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address
BINARY GLOBAL SUMMARY SCREEN
BINARY Global Summary
GB1 :
GB2 :
GB3 :
GB4 :
GB5 :
GB6 :
GB7 :
GB8 :
GB9 :
GB10:
GB11:
GB12:
GB13:
GB14:
GB15:
GB16:
GB17:
GB18:
GB19:
GB20:
Description
Linux Global
Linux Global
Print Test
Linux Global
1
2
3
4
5
6
Linux Global
New Test
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
Linux Global
GB
1
Message
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Time Date
08:56 1/21
State
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Alarm Time
15:40 01/16
15:40 01/16
The WCC III system has 512 binary globals. The term “binary”
simply means a value which is represented by one of two
conditions, ON or OFF. The term “global” means information
which is shared by all of the satellite controllers in the system.
Therefore, a “binary global” is an ON/OFF value which can be
used by any satellite controller within the WCC III system.
BINARY:
The WCC III can generate the ON or OFF value of the global
binary using either the Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm,
Alarm by Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, and PWM, and Lead
Lag mode of operation.
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired summary type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>. (If you select a summary type that is different than
that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the
appropriate screen information.
WCCIII Logical Addressing
GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary, XXX = Global Binary
Address
3-160
Specifies the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a
choice field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the
bottom of the screen:
<ANALOG, BINARY>
To view or edit a specific binary global, simply position the cursor
(shown as “>” along the left hand side of the screen) using the
cursor positioning (arrow) to the desired point and press <Enter>.
The Binary Global Screen for the specified point will now appear.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global Summary Screen
Time / Date
Alarm Time
The present time and date will automatically appear at these
locations.
The WCC III system has the capability of alarming if the value
of a binary global is either ON or OFF. The time that the alarm
occurred is shown here.
Description
The description message which was entered on the Binary Global
Screen is displayed here to aid you in identifying the different
binary globals within the system.
However, if a global alarm is active, the alarm class will appear on
the Main Menu after the “Active alarms in classes:” statement. The
alarm will also show on the Alarm Summary Screen.
Acknowledge Alarms
Message
Specifies a message programmed into the Binary Global Screen,
either one for the binary global OFF state or one for the binary
global ON state, depending on what State the Binary Global is
currently in.
State
The global binary alarms are acknowledged from the Global
Binary Summary Screen by moving the cursor to the active alarm
and selecting <Action> from the Top Menu Bar and then selecting
<Acknowledge Alarm>. If the global binary value has returned to
normal, the alarm message will be cleared from the screen. It can
take up to 30 seconds before the alarm is cleared from the screen.
There are two messages which appear under this heading. The first
one is the On/Off message the user enters on the Global Binary
Screen. The second will be one of the following messages which
describe the current status of the global binary value.
ON - The binary global is ON.
OFF - The binary global is OFF.
DUTYCYC - The binary global is OFF, because it has
been overridden by the duty cycle program.
SHED - The binary global is OFF, because it has
been overridden by the shed/restore
program.
OVR -
The binary global is forced ON and OFF
due to a command on the override screen.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-161
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global Screen
Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address
BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN
BINARY
Global #:
1
Description: Global Binary 1
On
Mode: 1 Combinatorial
Value is ON when ANY of the following conditions are met.
W1 is on default false
In Local Set this global defaults to Last Value.
-- Alarm -Set Condition: None
Type 1
Name is GB1
Message #: 1 ON
Off Message #:
2 OFF
Message: 5 Global Alarm
HOME for menu
Binary Global #: ____
Specifies the global number and its type. Because this is a choice
field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom
of the screen:
<ANALOG, BINARY>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired global type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>. (If you select a global type that is different than
that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the
appropriate screen information.)
Specifies a short message which is displayed on Summary and Data
Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering points within the
system. You may enter up to 20 characters (control, codes, ALT
codes, and the double quote character are not allowed).
On Message #: ____ Off Message #: ____
Specifies a pair of message numbers, one for the binary global OFF
state and the second for the binary global ON state. These numbers
are used by the system to reference a textual message which is
displayed in association with this binary global.
If you would like to edit a different global, simply position the
cursor to this field by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys,
enter the desired global number, and press <Enter>. The new
screen will automatically appear.
name is ______
Specifies the name (point address) of this binary global. Any changes
to the global number (above) will be reflected in this point address
(e.g., BINARY Global #: 28 would show GB28 as the name).
Description: ________________
3-162
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global Combinatorial Mode Screen
Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address
BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN
COMBINATORIAL MODE
BINARY
Global #:
1
Name is GB1
Description: Global Binary 1
Mode: 1 Combinatorial
On Message #:
Off Message #:
1 ON
2 OFF
Value is OFF when ANY of the following conditions are met.
W1 is ON default false
In Local set this global defaults to Last Value.
-----------------------ALARM------------------------Set Condition: None
Type: 1
Message 5 Global Alarm
HOME for menu
Mode: 1 Combinatorial
Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the
binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm,
Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM,
Lead-Lag>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the
existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature.
The Combinatorial mode has the capability of generating the
ON or OFF value of the binary global using “and/or” logic. For
example, binary global #1 (GB1) can be programmed to be ON
if the outside air temperature is above 60 ºF, the building is in the
day mode, and the chilled water pump is running. The WCC III
system could then be programmed to turn on a chiller whenever
GB1 is ON. The mode used to generate the ON/OFF value of the
binary global using “and/or” logic is called Combinatorial because
several statements are combined together to determine the ON or
OFF value of the binary global.
WCC III Technical Guide
Value is ____ when ____ of the following conditions are
met
Specifies the state (or value) that the binary global will take if the
specified conditions are true. Because these two fields are choice
fields, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom
of the screen:
<OFF, ON> and <ANY, ALL>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired value and condition have been selected,
and then press <Enter>.
To understand how the combinatorial binary global works, a short
description of logic is needed. The combinatorial global is read
as “Value is (ON or OFF) when (ANY or ALL) of the following
conditions are met.”
The phrase “Value is (ON or OFF)...” simply states what value the
binary global will have if and only if the rest of the phrase is a true
statement.
3-163
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global Combinatorial Mode Screen
This second part of the sentence reads as “...when (ANY or ALL) of
the following conditions are met.” If the word “ANY” is selected,
the binary global will take on the specific value if at least one of
the statements following the sentence is true. If the word “ALL”
is selected, then the binary global will take on the specified value
if and only if all of the statements following the sentences are true.
The logical equivalent for “ANY” is the boolean function “OR,”
and the logical equivalent for “ALL” is the boolean function
“AND.”
_____ is ON default
_____ is OFF default
true
false
Next on the Binary Global Screen is a list of “statements” which
are used to determine the “trueness” or falseness” of the binary
global. These statements are constructed by entering the logical
address of a particular point. This is best shown by the following
examples:
Value is ON when ANY of the following conditions are met:
W2 is ON
GB5 is OFF
default FALSE
default TRUE
The segment of the screen shown above would read, “Value is ON
when either week schedule #2 is ON or binary global #5 is OFF.”
Note that the word “or” was used to describe the global.
Value is ON when ALL of the following conditions are met:
1K1H is ON
W6 is OFF
default TRUE
default FALSE
This screen would read, “Value is ON when the 1H contact of
satellite #1 is ON and week schedule 6 is OFF.” Again, note that
the word “and” was used to describe the global.
If a value or any of the point addresses specified by the user cannot
be found, then the system will look at the command given in the
“default” column. In other words, in the example given, if week
schedule #6 (W6) cannot be found (i.e., it has not been set up), then
the system will consider the statement “W6 is OFF” to be a false
statement, and therefore it will assume W6 is ON.
3-164
In Local Set this global defaults to _____.
Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite
is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost
communications with the front end computer.
Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices
will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Off, On, Last Value>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None
Type: 0
Message 0
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of
this binary global is either ON or OFF.
Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the
Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate
an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off”
to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off.
Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the page.
<None, Off, On>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF
Message Screen.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global Compare Mode Screen
Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address
BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN
COMPARE MODE
BINARY
Global #: _10
Description: Example
Mode: 2 Compare
Value is ON if
Default value :
name is GB 10
On Message #:
Off Message #:
1A4
25.000
>
2A5
Hysteresis:
20.000
1 On
2 Off
±
---0.000
In Local Set this global defaults to Off.
-------------------ALARM-------------------Set Condition: None
Type: 0
Message: 0
HOME for menu
Mode: 2 Compare
Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the
binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm,
Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM,
Lead-Lag>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the
existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature.
The compare mode generates the ON or OFF value of the binary
global depending on how one analog value compares to another
analog value.
The Compare Screen allows the WCC III system to do “greater
than/less than” logic. The ON or OFF value of the binary global
is determined by one numerical value being [equal to], [greater
than or equal to], [less than], or [less than or equal to] another
numerical value. For example, the WCC III system could monitor
the enthalpy (total heat content) of the outside air and the return
air and select he air stream with the lowest heat content to be used
for cooling. The Compare Screen could be used to cause binary
WCC III Technical Guide
global #2 (GB2) to go ON if the outside air enthalpy is less than the
return air enthalpy, indicating that the outside air should be used
for cooling. The WCC III system could then be programmed to
open the outside air damper and lose the return air damper when
GB2 is ON.
Value is ON if
Default value:
1A4
25
>
2A5
20
In the above example, the global binary will be ON when the value
of 1A4 (analog input #4 on satellite controller #1) is greater than
2A5 (analog input #5 on satellite controller #2). If the analog value
is unavailable, the system will use the default value below the
analog value. For example, if satellite controller #1 was off-line,
the value for analog input #4 on satellite controller would default
to 25.
Entering a Constant Number
If you want to enter a constant for one of the two values, leave
the top blank and enter a number in the default space as shown
below:
Value is ON if
Default value:
1A4
25
>
-----20
In the above example, the value of the global binary will be ON
when 1A4 is greater than 20.
3-165
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global Compare Mode Screen
Math Operators (>, = =, !=)
In Local Set this global defaults to _____.
The math operators are in a choice field and therefore the list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite
is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost
communications with the front end computer.
CHOICE (>, ==, !=)
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<ENTER>.
Math Operator
Description
>
The statement is true when the
value to the left of the symbol is
greater than the value to the right.
(Or, the statement is true when
the value to the right is less than
the value to the left.)
==
The statement is true when the
value to the left is equal to the
value to the right.
!=
The statement is true when the
value to the left of the symbol
does not equal the value to the
right of the symbol.
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None
Type: 0
Message 0
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of
this binary global is either ON or OFF.
Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the
Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate
an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off”
to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off.
<None, Off, On>
This entry allows you to add hysteresis to the equation:
1A4 > 2A5
25
20
Hysteresis
GA2
5
NOTE:
The Value is On if and Hysteresis line must be
addressable points. If left blank, the program will use the
default values.
In the above example, the value of 1A4 must be greater than 2A5
by the value of Hysteresis before the global will go ON. Also, the
value of 2A5 must be less than 1A4 by the value of Hysteresis
before the global binary will go OFF. If the analog value that is
entered here (GA2 in the above example) is invalid or unavailable,
the default value under the analog value will be used as the amount
of hysteresis. You may also use [analog] point addresses such as
analog inputs or global analogs.
3-166
<Off, On, Last Value>
Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the page.
Hysteresis
Value ON if
Default value:
Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices
will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF
Message Screen.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global External Mode Screen
Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address
BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN
EXTERNAL MODE
Mode: 3 External
Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the
binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm,
Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM,
Lead-Lag>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the
existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature.
The Global Binary Mode 3 External Screen was created to generate
the binary value of the binary global depending on how a binary
value from an external function or program.
WCC III Technical Guide
Examples: The binary value from a global bridge which needs the
WCC Utility program running, the Lead-Lag mode where this
global would control the second unit, or a external program that is
designed for the WCC system.
Global Value ____ comes from external device.
This is the value that comes from the external device. Since the
first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Off, On>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<Enter>.
Although you can enter a desired choice here, this value will
default to the state coming from the external device when you exit
this screen.
3-167
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global External Mode Screen
In Local Set this global defaults to _____.
Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite
is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost
communications with the front end computer.
Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the
Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate
an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off”
to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off.
Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices
will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the page.
<Off, On, Last Value>
<None, Off, On>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None
Type: 0
Message 0
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of
this binary global is either ON or OFF.
Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF
Message Screen.
3-168
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global Alarm Mode Screen
Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address
BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN
ALARM MODE
BINARY
Global #:
2
Description: Linux Global
Mode: 4 Alarm
Name is GB5
On Message #:
Off Message #:
1 On
2 Off
Value is OFF if GA1 is active alarm and Current in Alarm and Alarm acknowledged
In Local Set this global defaults to Last Value.
Set Condition:
None
ALARM
Type:
1
Message 5 Global Alarm
HOME for menu
Mode: 4 Alarm
Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the
binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm,
Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM,
Lead-Lag>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the
existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature.
The Alarm mode causes the binary global to generate an ON or
OFF value based on either an active or non active alarm that has
been either acknowledged or not acknowledged.
Value is ON if 1A2 is active alarm
and [Current in Alarm]
and [Alarm not acknowledged]
In the above example, the ON or OFF value of the global binary
is determined by the alarm status of analog input #2 on satellite
controller #1. When an alarm occurs, the alarm message will blink
on the Analog Input Screen. After the alarm has been acknowledged,
one of two things will happen. If the value of the analog input is
presently within the alarm limits, the alarm message will disappear.
If the value of the analog input is still outside the alarm limits, the
message will stay on the screen, but it will quit blinking.
WCC III Technical Guide
The term “active alarm” means that the alarm has not been
cleared. It is either a “blinking” or “solid” alarm within the
system.
The conditional statements are in a “choice” field and therefore the
choices are shown at the bottom of the screen.
<Current in Alarm, Current not in Alarm, NONE>
<Alarm Acknowledged, Alarm not Acknowledged,
NONE>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
[NONE]
[NONE]
When NONE is selected for both of the choice
fields, the value of the global binary will change
state (go ON in the above example) whenever the
analog input specified on this screen is in an alarm
condition, either unacknowledged (“blinking”
alarm) or acknowledged (“solid” alarm).
[NONE]
[Alarm
Acknowledged]
When these choices are selected, the value of the global
binary will go ON when the alarm for the analog input
is acknowledged while the value of the analog input is
outside the alarm limits. That is to say, the global binary
will go ON whenever this analog input has “solid”
alarm condition.
3-169
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global Alarm Mode Screen
In Local Set this global defaults to _____.
[NONE]
[Alarm Not
Acknowledged]
When these choices are selected, the value of
the global binary will go ON when the alarm for
the analog input has not been acknowledged and
remains a “blinking” alarm.
[Current in
Alarm]
[NONE]
When these choices are selected, the value of the
global binary will go ON when the value of the
analog input is outside of the alarm limits.
[Current in
Alarm]
[Alarm
Acknowledged]
When these choices are selected, the value of the
global binary will go ON while the value of the
analog input is outside the alarm limits and the
alarm has been acknowledged (“solid” alarm).
[Current in
Alarm]
[Alarm not
Acknowledged]
When these choices are selected, the value of the
global binary will go ON while the value of the
analog input is outside the alarm limits and the
alarm is unacknowledged (“blinking” alarm).
[Current not in
Alarm]
[NONE]
When these choices are selected, the value of the global
binary will go ON when the value of the analog input
returns inside the alarm limits, regardless of whether it
has been acknowledged or not.
[Current not in
Alarm]
[Alarm
Acknowledged]
When these choices are selected, the value of the
global binary will go ON when the value of the analog
input returns inside the alarm limits, provided it was
acknowledged while it was outside the alarm limits.
Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the
Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate
an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off”
to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off.
[Current not in
Alarm]
[Alarm not
Acknowledged]
When these choices are selected, the value of
the global binary will go ON when the value of
the analog input returns inside the alarm limits,
provided it was not acknowledged while it was
outside the alarm limits.
Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the page.
Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite
is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost
communications with the front end computer.
Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices
will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Off, On, Last Value>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None
Type: 0
Message 0
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of
this binary global is either ON or OFF.
<None, Off, On>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF
Message Screen.
3-170
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global Alarm-By-Class Mode Screen
Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address
BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN
ALARM-BY-CLASS MODE
BINARY
Global #:
Description: Alarm
Mode: 5 Alarm-by-Class
1
Name is GB1
On Message #:
Off Message #:
10 Alarm
11 Normal
Value is ON when alarm class 0 is active and not acknowledged
In Local Set this global defaults to LAST VALUE
-----------------------ALARM------------------------Set Condition: None
Type: 1
Message 5 Global Alarm
HOME for menu
Mode: 5 Alarm-by-Class
Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the
binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm,
Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM,
Lead-Lag>
For example, assume that all of the room temperatures in a building
are assigned a level 3 alarm priority, and global binary #10 (GB10)
is set to go ON when alarm class 3 is active and not acknowledged.
GB10 will be ON when any room temperature is in alarm and has
not yet been acknowledged.
Value is ____ when alarm class X is active and not
acknowledged X=1 to 8
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the
existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature.
Specifies the state (or value) that the binary global will take if
specified conditions are true. Because the first field is a choice
field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom
of the screen:
<OFF, ON>
Alarm Classes 1 to 8
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<Enter>.
The WCC III system has the capability of distinguishing between 8
different alarm levels or alarm types. Alarm type #1 has the highest
priority and will be reported before alarm type #2, etc. The WCC
III system has the capability to e-mail-out the first 5 alarm types or
Alarm Levels.
When the Alarm-by-Class mode is selected, the ON/OFF value of
the global binary is generated if any point within the system that is
assigned to this alarm type goes into alarm.
WCC III Technical Guide
The phrase “Value is (On or Off)...” simply states what value the
binary global will have if and only if the rest of the phrase is a true
statement.
This second part of the sentence reads as “when alarm class (X) is
active and not acknowledged.” The “X” stands for the alarm class
number. There are eight different alarm classes or types, numbered
from 1-8. Alarm type #1 has the highest priority and will be reported
before alarm type #2, etc. The WCC III system has the capability to
e-mail out the first 5 alarm types or alarm levels.
3-171
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global Alarm-By-Class Mode Screen
In Local Set this global defaults to _____.
Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite
is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost
communications with the front end computer.
Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices
will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Off, On, Last Value>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None
Type: 0
Message 0
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of
this binary global is either ON or OFF.
Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the
Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate
an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off”
to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off.
Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the page.
<None, Off, On>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF
Message Screen.
3-172
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global One Shot Mode Screen
Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address
BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN
ONE SHOT MODE
Mode: 6 One Shot
Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the
binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm,
Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM,
Lead-Lag>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the
existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature.
Value is ON for _______seconds when ________changes
from Off to On.
This is a three part statement. The first part is the amount of time
this binary global will stay on when a binary value within the
system changes state, either “Off to On”, “On to Off” or both “Off
to On” and “On to Off”. This user-programmed amount of time is
in seconds.
The second part of this statement is the binary input that must
change state for this global to be on.
The third part of this statement is a choice field. The following list
of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<from Off to On., from On to Off., .>
The One Shot mode causes the binary global to generate an ON
value for a programmable amount of time based on a Binary value
changing from “Off to On”, “On to Off”, or both “Off to On” and
“On to Off.”
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the
existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature.
The “ .” selection will cause this binary global to generate an ON
value each time the programmed binary input value changes from
either “Off to On” or “On to Off”
WCC III Technical Guide
3-173
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global One Shot Mode Screen
In Local Set this global defaults to _____.
Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite
is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost
communications with the front end computer.
Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices
will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Off, On, Last Value>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None
Type: 0
Message 0
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of
this binary global is either ON or OFF.
Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the
Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate
an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off”
to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off.
Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the page.
<None, Off, On>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF
Message Screen.
3-174
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global Clock Mode Screen
Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address
BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN
CLOCK MODE
Mode: 7 Clock
Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the
binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm,
Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM,
Lead-Lag>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the
existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature.
The Clock mode causes the binary global to generate an ON value
for a programmable amount of time and then an OFF value for a
programmable amount of time based on a binary input value being
either “Off” or “On”. This global will constantly cycle off and on
for the programmed amounts of time as long as the binary input is
in the desired “On” or “Off” state.
WCC III Technical Guide
NOTE:
Since this global is based on time (i.e. clock mode),
if the binary input changes state during the “On” time or the
“Off” time, then this binary global will change to the OFF
value. If the binary input changes state again it will turn ON or
OFF depending on what state this global should be in based on
time.
Example: Value is ON for 120 seconds and OFF for 120 seconds
when 5L3 in ON.
When 5L3 is initially turned ON, this binary global will turn on.
After 20 seconds, 5L3 is turned OFF, so this binary global will turn
off. After another 30 seconds, 5L3 is turned back ON; now this
binary global will turn back on for the remaining 70 seconds and
then go to the off mode for 120 seconds.
3-175
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global Clock Mode Screen
When 5L3 is initially turned ON, this binary global will turn on.
After 120 seconds this binary global will go into the off mode.
After another 20 seconds, 5L3 is turned OFF, so this binary global
will stay in the OFF mode. After another 30 seconds, 5L3 is
turned back ON; now this binary global will stay in the off mode
for the remaining 70 seconds and then go to the on mode for 120
seconds.
Value is ON for _______seconds and OFF for _______when
________ is On.
This is a four part statement. The first part is the amount of time
this binary global will stay ON when a binary input value within
the system is either “Off” or “On”. The second part is the amount
of time this binary global will stay OFF when a binary input value
within the system is either “Off” or “On”. These user programmed
amounts of time are in seconds.
The third part of this statement is the binary input that must be
either “OFF” or “ON” for this global to be on and off for the
programmed amounts of time.
The fourth part of this statement is a choice field, the following list
of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
In Local Set this global defaults to _____.
Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite
is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost
communications with the front end computer.
Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices
will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Off, On, Last Value>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None
Type: 0
Message 0
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of
this binary global is either ON or OFF.
Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the
Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate
an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off”
to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off.
<OFF, ON>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the
existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature.
Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the page.
<None, Off, On>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF
Message Screen.
3-176
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global Delay Mode Screen
Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address
BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN
DELAY MODE
Mode: 8 Delay
Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the
binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm,
Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM,
Lead-Lag>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the
existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature.
The Delay mode causes the binary global to be delayed turning ON
after a binary input has turned on and delayed turning OFF after
the binary input has turned off.
Example: Value is delayed 60 seconds for 5L3.
When binary input 5L3 is turned “On”, there will be a 60 second
delay before this binary global will turn on. Once the binary input
5L3 is turned off, there will a 60 second delay before this binary
global will turn off.
NOTE:
If the binary input is turned on then off before the
delay time has expired to turn this binary global on, the binary
global will turn on after the programmed delay and then turn
off the programmed amount of time from the time the binary
input was turned off.
Example: Value is delayed 120 seconds for 5L3.
If the binary input (5L3) is turned on and then turned off after 45
seconds, the binary global will turn on 120 seconds after the binary
input was turned on and then the binary global will turn off after 45
seconds, which will be 120 seconds from the time the binary input
was turned off.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-177
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global Delay Mode Screen
Value is delayed_______seconds for________ .
This is a two part statement. The first part is a user-programmed
amount of time in seconds this binary global will be delayed
turning ON when a binary value within the system is turned “On”
and delayed turning OFF when the binary input is turned “Off”.
The second part of this statement is the binary input that must be
“ON” for this binary global to be delayed for the programmed
amount of time before turning on.
In Local Set this global defaults to _____.
Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite
is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost
communications with the front end computer.
Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices
will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Off, On, Last Value>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None
Type: 0
Message 0
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of
this binary global is either ON or OFF.
Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the
Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate
an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off”
to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off.
Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the page.
<None, Off, On>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF
Message Screen.
3-178
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global PWM Mode Screen
Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address
BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN
PWM MODE
Mode: 9 PWM
Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the
binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm,
Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM,
Lead-Lag>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the
existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature.
WCC III Technical Guide
The Global Analog Mode 9 PWM Screen was created for PWM
control of a valve, solenoid, or heating element. PWM stands for
Pulse Width Modulation. Pulse-width modulation (PWM) is a
very efficient way of providing intermediate amounts of electrical
power between fully on and fully off. The term duty cycle describes
the proportion of on time to the regular interval or period of time;
a low duty cycle corresponds to low power, because the power is
off for most of the time. Duty cycle is expressed in percent, 100%
being fully on. PWM works well with digital controls, which,
because of their on/off nature, can easily set the needed duty cycle.
PWM control can be used to reduce the total amount of power
delivered to a load without losses normally incurred when a power
source is limited by resistive means. This is because the average
power delivered is proportional to the modulation duty cycle.
3-179
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global PWM Mode Screen
PWM Mode
In Local Set this global defaults to _____.
The PWM mode monitor analog input and convert it to binary
output with pulse width modulation. The PWM mode has three
setpoints—PWM period, Maximum Input, and Minimum Input.
When the monitored analog input exceeds Maximum Input, this
binary will always be ON. When the monitored analog input drops
below Minimum Input, this binary will always be OFF. When
the monitored analog input is between the Maximum Input and
Minimum Input, the binary will modulate between ON and OFF
based on the monitored analog input value. For example, the PWM
period is 100 seconds, the Maximum Input is 10, the Minimum
Input is 0. When the monitored analog input is less than 0, this
binary will be OFF all of the time. When the monitored analog
input is above 10, the binary will be ON all of the time. When the
monitored analog input is 5, the binary will be OFF for 50 seconds
and ON for 50 seconds. When the monitored analog input is 3,
the binary will be OFF for 70 seconds and ON for 30 seconds.
When the monitored analog input is 8, the binary will be OFF for
20 seconds and ON or 80 seconds.
Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite
is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost
communications with the front end computer.
Value is the modulation of ______ with period
of ______ seconds.
The “modulation of” is an analog input point within the system. A
valid WCC III analog structured value must be used as an analog
input value for this screen to operate correctly. Satellite Analog
Input (XXXAY), Satellite Data Register “a” (XXXRYa), Satellite
Data Register “b” (XXXRYb), Satellite Analog Output (XXXPY),
Global Analog (GAZZZ), where XXX equals 1 to 239, Y equals 1
to 8, and ZZZ equals 1 to 256.
The “period of” is the total amount of time in one cycle. This is the
combined amount of time on and off in one cycle. The term duty
cycle describes the proportion of on time to the regular interval or
period of time; a low duty cycle corresponds to low power, because
the power is off for most of the time.
maximum value of _______
When the monitored analog input exceeds Maximum Input, this
binary will always be ON.
Since the first field is a “choice” field, the list of available choices
will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
<Off, On, Last Value>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None
Type: 0
Message 0
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of
this binary global is either ON or OFF.
Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the
Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate
an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off”
to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off.
Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be
displayed at the bottom of the page.
<None, Off, On>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF
Message Screen.
minimum value of _______
When the monitored analog input drops below Minimum Input,
this binary will always be OFF.
3-180
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global Lead Lag Mode Screen
Binary Global Screen’s WCC III Logical Address is GBXXX, where GB = Global Binary and XXX = Global Binary Address
BINARY GLOBAL SCREEN
LEAD LAG MODE
Mode: 10 Lead-Lag
Operation based on:
Specifies the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the
binary global. Because this is a choice field, the following list of
available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:
This field must have a valid WCC III binary structured value that
must be used as a binary input value for this screen to operate
correctly. Satellite Binary Input (XXXLWW), Satellite Control
“C” output (XXXkYc), Satellite Control “H” output (XXXkYh)),
Satellite Binary Output (XXXOWW), Global Binary (GBZZZ),
where WW equals 1 to 16, XXX equals 1 to 239, Y equals 1 to 8,
and ZZZ equals 1 to 512.
<Combinatorial, Compare, External, Alarm,
Alarm-by-Class, One Shot, Clock, Delay, PWM,
Lead-Lag>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press
<Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must first clear the
existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature.
Lead-Lag Mode is a dual or two-stage control scheme to balance
the operating run time between two units for redundant operation.
Each time the current source (the binary point that this global’s
operation is based on) is turned “ON”, this program will determine
which unit to turn on, either Lead or Lag, based on the current
Lead-Lag ratio and the current Lead-Lag run times.
WCC III Technical Guide
NOTE: The very next Global Binary is the 2nd global binary
value for the lag (Secondary) and must be set to Global Binary
“Mode 3: External” for proper operation.
Proof of flow:
This field must have a valid WCC III binary input value and is
used as a feedback mechanism to ensure that the valve/pump has
actually turned on and is working properly.
3-181
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global Lead Lag Mode Screen
Current source status:
Current run time:
This field will display the current active state of the value that was
programmed into the “Operation based on” field.
List the current runtime of the lead or lag (Primary or Secondary)
control in minutes. This field is reset by the Command field being
RESET.
Current Proof of flow status:
This field will display the current active state of the value that was
programmed into the “Proof of flow” field.
Lead/Lag ratio:
This field has four user-selectable options—50-50, 60-40, 70-30,
and 75-25. The first number corresponds to the Lead (Primary)
percent of operation, and the second number corresponds to the
Lag (Secondary) percent of operation. Because this is a choice
field, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom
of the page.
<50-50, 60-40, 70-30, 75-25>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Proof of flow delay:
This is delay in minutes before switching operation of the Lead/
Lag control due to lack of flow. Could be hooked to a sail type
switch for airflow or an “ON/OFF” pressure switch for piping. If
there is no proof of flow within this amount of time the operation
will switch to either Lead or Lag control depending on the current
state of control.
Example: if currently in Lead control and there is no proof of flow
after the programmed amount of time it will switch to Lag control.
If proof of flow is lost during the Lead (or Lag) control it may
take up to the programmed proof of flow delay time in minutes to
switch to the Lag (or Lead) control.
NOTE: If the proof of flow delay has not been programmed (0
minutes) then this global will use 1 minute as the proof of flow
delay.
Current Lead/Lag ratio:
The is the percentage of the Lead control being “ON” verses the
Lag control being “ON”. It is calculated by Lead time / (Lead
time + Lag time). This field is reset by the Command field being
RESET.
3-182
Current Lead status:
Displays the current state of the lead device (Primary) and should
be either “ON” or “OFF”. Either the Lead or Lag should be “ON”
but not both. The same applies to being “OFF”.
Current Lag status:
Displays the current state of the lag device (Secondary) and should
be either “ON” or “OFF”. Either the Lead or Lag should be “ON”
but not both. The same applies to being “OFF”.
Current setup status:
The current setup status is the status of the operation, and
will be listed as the following: OK, Bad Source, Bad Proof,
or Bad Next structure. When the current setup status is OK, it
displays blank. When the current setup status is Bad Source,
it displays “Bad Source” which means that the source address
is not a correct binary address. When the current setup status
is Bad Proof, it displays “Bad Proof “which means that the
proof of flow address is not a correct binary address. When the
current setup status is Bad Next structure, it displays “Bad Next
Structure” which means the next structure is not EXTERNAL
mode. The Lead-Lag mode has two outputs. The next global
binary has to be set to EXTERNAL mode for this mode to run.
Current Lead run time:
Displays the current “Lead” (primary) run time in hours. This field
is reset by the Command field being RESET.
Current Lag run time:
Displays the current “Lag” (secondary) run time in hours. This
field is reset by the Command field being RESET.
Command:
Selects the “Reset” command for the resetting of the runtime fields
for Current Lead Run time field, and the Current Lag Run time
field. Because this is a choice field, the list of available choices will
be displayed at the bottom of the page.
<____, RESET>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Binary Global Lead Lag Mode Screen
In Local Set this global defaults to _____.
Specifies the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite
is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost
communications with the front end computer. Since the first field
is a “choice” field, the list of available choices will be displayed at
the bottom of the screen:
<Off, On, Last Value>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
------------ALARM------------Set Condition: None
Type: 0
Message 0
The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of
this binary global is either ON or OFF.
Set the condition to “None” to not generate an alarm whenever the
Binary Global is Off or On. Set the condition to “On” to generate
an alarm whenever this Binary Global is On. Set condition to “Off”
to generate an alarm whenever this Binary Global is Off. Because
this is a choice field, the list of available choices will be displayed
at the bottom of the page.
<None, Off, On>
Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each
choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then
press <Enter>.
Type specifies the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms
generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest
priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system displays and e-mails
higher priority alarms first. (The first five alarm priorities (1-5)
have e-mail-out-on-alarm capabilities.)
The message number corresponds to a message on the ON/OFF
Message Screen.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-183
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Shed/Restore Screen
SHED/RESTORE SCREEN
Shed/Restore Program # 1
Shed/Restore based on input:
and schedule:
On Schedule
500.000 KW
450.000 KW
Shed level:
Restore level:
Shed/Restore rate:
Items to shed:
3A1
Off Schedule
700.000 KW
650.000 KW
1 minute/item
GB21
GB29
GB22
GB30
GB23
GB31
W1
GB24
GB32
Default # of items shed: 8
Current # of items shed: 0
GB25
GB26
GB27
GB33
GB34
GB35
GB28
GB36
HOME for menu
Shed/Restore Program #:
Specifies the number of the program you are currently editing. The
WCC III system has 10 shed/restore programs.
Shed/Restore based on input:
Specifies the [analog] point address that acts as the input signal
source for this shed/restore program. For example, if you are
monitoring the kW demand of a building, and the kW meter is
connected to analog input #1 of satellite controller #10, you would
input 10A1. You may also use global analog values for this input.
and schedule:
Specifies the [binary] point address that provides the schedule
control of the shed/restore program. When this address is zero (or
OFF), the OFF schedule mode is selected. When this address is one
(or ON), the ON schedule mode is selected.
This field must have a valid WCC III binary structured value that
must be used as a binary input value for this screen to operate
correctly. Satellite Binary Input (XXXLWW), Satellite Control
“C” output (XXXkYc), Satellite Control “H” output (XXXkYh),
Satellite Binary Output (XXXOWW), Global Binary (GBZZZ),
where WW equals 1 to 16, XXX equals 1 to 239, Y equals 1 to 8,
and ZZZ equals 1 to 512.
3-184
On Schedule
Off Schedule
Shed Level:
Restore Level:
When the [analog] input associated with this program rises to the
shed level, the system will start turning off the binary globals which
are listed as “items to be shed.” When the [analog] input associated
with this program falls to the restore level, the system will start
turning the binary globals listed as “items to be shed” back on.
Shed/Restore rate:
Specifies the time interval the system uses to turn the items on
or off. For example, if you have a shed/restore rate of 1 minute
per item, and the value of the analog input rises above the shed
level, the system will shut off the first binary global (GB21 on the
example screen) and wait one minute. If the analog input value is
still above the shed level, the next global will be turned off (GB22
on the example screen). This process will continue (through GB36)
until the value of the analog input is below the shed level. After the
value of the analog input falls below the shed level, the system
will not turn any binary globals back on until the analog value falls
below the restore level. At this point, the system will start bringing
the binary globals back on at the time interval specified by the
shed/restore rate in reverse order starting with the last binary global
that was shed.
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Shed/Restore Screen
Default Number of Items to Shed:
This input allows the system to “soft-start” the items after a power
failure. For example, if you enter 3 for this input, this will stage
the 3 items on at the designated shed/restore rate after the power
has been restored to the WCC III - MCD. Item 3 will be turned on
first and item 1 last.
Current # of items shed:
This location informs you of the number of item(s) which have
been shed.
Items to shed:
The user enters the names of the binary globals which will be used
in the shed/restore program. There may be up to 16 items entered
per program. Only binary globals may be entered in these spaces,
but some spaces may be left blank if desired. If a space is left
blank, the system will pause for the amount of time specified by
the shed/restore rate as it comes to the blank space.
NOTE:
To cause equipment to be turned off when the binary
globals are turned off, use the binary globals listed on this
screen to control the schedule of the equipment. For example,
if you want to turn off a bathroom exhaust fan if the building
kW reaches the shed level of 500 kW, as shown on the example
screen, then you should control the bathroom exhaust fan based
on a time clock mode which selects its “ON” schedule by a binary
global as outlined below:
1. Enter a week schedule which corresponds to the
schedule of the exhaust fan. For example, if you
want the exhaust fan to be on during the day unless
the kW demand of the building reaches its peak
but off all the time at night, enter a week schedule
which is “ON” during the day and “OFF” at night.
2. Create a binary global which is “ON” whenever the
corresponding week schedule is ON.
3. Input the global binary on a time clock screen as the
binary inputs that select the schedule. A portion of
the time clock screen is shown below:
Contact is: CLOSED in “On” Schedule
Selected by: GB5
When GB5 is “ON,” the contact on the satellite
controller is closed and the exhaust fan is on. When the
building reaches its shed level, GB5 goes “OFF” which
causes the contact to open which causes the exhaust
fan to go off.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-185
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Duty Cycle Screen
DUTY CYCLE SCREEN
Duty Cycling Program #: 1
Items to shed:
1
GB221
GB222
GB223
GB224
GB225
GB226
GB227
GB228
GB229
GB230
GB231
GB232
2
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
3
v
4
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
<-->
5
Program is: 15 segments of:
1 minutes each
Currently in segment #: 4
Segment
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
segment where item is off
HOME for menu
Duty Cycling Program #:
Currently in segment #:
Specifies the number of the program you are currently editing. The
WCC III has 5 duty cycle programs.
This area automatically displays which segment the duty cycling
program is currently in.
Program is: ____ segments
Items to Shed:
Choose how many segments you would like to set up for the duty
cycling duration. There is a maximum of 15 segments for a duty
cycle program. When a “v” (lower case v) has been input under a
segment, the item will be off at this point for the amount of time
entered above.
Enter Global Binary values which will be duty cycled by this
program. You may enter up to twelve items per program. Only
Binary Global values may be used in this program.
of: ____ minutes each
A user entered value specifying the time interval of each segment.
You may input a value of 1 to 60 minutes in this field.
3-186
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Duty Cycle Screen
NOTE: To cause equipment to be turned off when the binary
globals are turned off, use the binary globals listed on this screen
to control the schedule of equipment. For example, if you want to
duty cycle a bathroom exhaust fan, then you should control the
bathroom exhaust fan based on a time clock mode which selects its
“ON” schedule by a binary global as outlined below:
1. Enter a week schedule which corresponds to the
schedule of the exhaust fan. For example, if you want
the exhaust fan to be duty cycled from 8:00 am to 5:00
pm M-F and off the rest of the time, you would create
a week schedule that is “ON” from 8:00 am to 5:00 pm
M-F.
3. Input the global binary on a time clock screen as the
binary input that selects the schedule. A portion of the
time clock screen is shown below:
Contact is: CLOSED in “On” Schedule
Selected by: GB6
When GB6 is ON, the contact on the satellite controller is
closed, and the exhaust fan is on. When GB6 is OFF, the
contact opens which causes the exhaust fan to go off. The
exhaust fan will be duty-cycled along with the binary global.
2. Create a binary global which is “ON” whenever the
corresponding week schedule is ON.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-187
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Proportional Reset Screen
PROPORTIONAL RESET SCREEN
Proportional #___1
Description:
As
Linux Proportional
4A2 varies from:
25.0 Deg F to:
75.0 Deg F,
Adjust the setpoint(s) of 4k1h
From: 200 Deg F
to: 80 Deg F for the following
EA Driver
--------------Setpoints to be Affected---------------Schedule
Schedule
Alt. Sch.
Alt. Sch.
On
Off
On
Off
*
Home for menu
Proportional #:
Specifies the number of the program you are currently editing. The
WCC III has 160 proportional reset screens.
The next two inputs on this line designate the range for the input
value. In our example the outside air temperature range is from
0º to 60º.
Description:
Adjust the setpoint(s) of _____
A short message is entered here to help you remember what the
reset schedule is used for.
This input designates the location of the control output which is to
have the setpoint adjusted. In our example, it is the location of the
output which controls the hot water valve. “1k3h” means that the
hot water valve is controlled by channel 3 of satellite controller #1.
The last letter in this input is either an “h” or a “c.” If channel 3
on satellite controller is programmed using the EA Driver Screen,
“h” is entered as the last letter. If channel 3 was programmed using
Dual Limit Screens, “h” means the contact in the satellite controller
which makes the “COM” to “H” terminals, and “c” means the
contact in the satellite controller which makes the “COM” to “C.”
As _____ varies from: _____ to: _____
The first input on this line is the value that is to serve as the analog
input for the Reset Screen. For example, assume that we want
to reset hot water temperature based on outside air temperature
according to the following reset schedule:
O.A. Temperature
0 ºF
60 ºF
H.W. Temperature
200 ºF
80 ºF
The analog input value is the outside air temperature sensor in the
above example. The outside air temperature sensor is entered as
“1A5” which means that the sensor is connected to channel #5
on satellite controller #1. Global analog values (GAn) can also be
entered at this location.
3-188
Example:
As 4A2 varies from: 0 Deg F to 60 Deg F
Adjust the setpoint(s) of 4K1h
From: 200 Deg F to 80 Deg F
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Proportional Reset Screen
Designate Setpoint to be Affected (*)
Dual High/Dual Low
An asterisk (*) is placed under the setpoint that is to be changed
according to the reset schedule. In the above example, the On
schedule setpoint is reset with outdoor air temperature.
Dual High or Dual Low means that the binary output which is
being used to control the output device (i.e. hot water valve) is
programmed using the Dual Limit Screen. The Dual Limit Screen
has time following setpoints available:
--------------Setpoints to be Affected-------------On
Schedule
EA Driver
Off
Schedule
Alt.
On Sch.
Alt.
Off Sch.
*
EA Driver
EA Driver means that the binary outputs which are being used to
control the output device (i.e. hot water valve) are programmed
using the EA Driver Screen. An EA Driver Screen has the following
setpoints available:
On Schedule:
Off Schedule:
160 ºF
120 ºF
On Schedule CLOSED
Off Schedule CLOSED
Alt On Schedule OPEN
Alt Off Schedule OPEN
Between
Between
Between
Between
Low Limit
90
80
0.0
0.0
&
&
&
&
High Limit
130 ºF
120 ºF
0.0 ºF
0.0 ºF
“Dual Low” is selected if the Low Limit setpoints are to be reset,
and “Dual High” is selected if the High Limit setpoints are to be
reset.
Alternate On: 0.0 ºF
Alternate Off: 0.0 ºF
The “EA Driver” input on this line is a choice field which allows
you to “tell” the system what screen has been used for the device
being controlled (i.e. hot water valve). Since this is a choice field,
the choices will appear on the bottom of the screen.
<EA Driver, Dual High, Dual Low>
Make your selection by using the arrow keys to move the cursor to
this field, then press the <space bar> once for each choice. When
the desired control type appears, press <Enter>.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-189
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Proportional Reset Graph
PROPORTIONAL RESET GRAPH
This graph is accessed from the Proportional Reset Screen. To
access the graph, select <Action> from the Top Menu Bar and then
select <Plot>.
The bottom of the graph shows the range of the input value along
with the actual value of the input, and the left side of the scale
shows the setpoint range along with the actual setpoint value.
3-190
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Tenant Override Utility List
TENANT OVERRIDE UTILITY LIST
Tenant Utility List # 1
Office Description: 1st Flr. East
Access Code: [12345]
Tenant Name: H/R Toys
Personal Code:
[1234]
The equipment addressed by the following control outputs
will be overridden by the Tenant Override Request Program:
GL:
GH:
GC:
Light Group:
Heat Group:
A/C Group:
[2k1h]
[2k2h]
[2k3h]
////
////
////
////
////
////
////
////
////
overridden time
////
////
////
00:00
00:00
00:00
HOME for menu
To access this screen, select <Tenant Override> from the Main
Menu. The user must have level 3 access to be able to access this
screen. The WCC III system has 500 screens like the one shown
above that allow the user to enter password information and
designate the outputs which are to be overridden for the lights,
heat, and A/C for up to 500 separate tenant designations.
Tenant Utility List #
Specifies the number of the program you are currently editing. 500
Utility Lists (or screens) are available.
Office Description:
The user may enter a description of the office to help in
remembering which zone is controlled by which override screen.
This description can be up to 12 characters.
Access Code:
This 5 digit number must be entered by the occupant when in the
TenantOverride.exe Program.
Tenant Name:
A tenant name is entered here to help identify the tenant area
assigned to this screen. This name can be up to 8 characters.
Personal Code:
The equipment addressed by the following outputs will be
overridden by the Tenant Override Request Program:
GL Light Group: [1k7c] [1k2h] [1k4h] //// ////
GH Heat Group: [1k3h]
////
////
//// ////
GC A/C Group: [1k5h] [1k6h] ////
//// ////
The operator assigns the outputs which are to be overridden by
entering data on this part of the screen.
In the above example, the following binary outputs on the satellite
controller will go “On” to turn the lights on when the tenant asks
for lights:
1k7c - Satellite number 1, COM to C contact on channel 7
1k2h - Satellite number 1, COM to H contact on channel 2
1k4h - Satellite number 1, COM to H contact on channel 4
When the tenant asks for heat, the following outputs will control
according to their occupied mode setpoints. For example, assume
that the satellite controller is set to maintain 72ºF during the day
(occupied period), and 65ºF during the night (unoccupied period).
If a tenant comes in at 8:00 pm in the evening when the setpoint is
65ºF, and that tenant asks for the heat to be overridden, the heating
setpoint will be changed to 72ºF.
1k3h - Satellite number 1, COM to H contact on channel 3
The cooling (A/C) override is similar to the heating override.
The 4 digit number assigned to each tenant must be entered when
in the TenantOverride.exe Program.
WCC III Technical Guide
3-191
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
Tenant Override Utility List
Tenant Override Screen #2
Caution: DO NOT enter the same output contact on two or
GL2 goes ON when the lights are overridden ON
GH2 goes ON when the heat is overridden ON
GC2 goes ON when the cooling is overridden ON
more separate Tenant Utility Lists. Use the “global” feature
if several zones (offices) require the same piece of central
equipment to be overridden.
These global values are then used as inputs in a Global Binary
Screen.
Global Override
Each category of equipment on each screen has a separate
global value which automatically goes ON when that category is
overridden ON.
Tenant Override Screen #1
GL1 goes ON when the lights are overridden ON
GH1 goes ON when the heat is overridden ON
GC1 goes ON when the cooling is overridden ON
In this example, assume that air handler #1 (AHU #1) is ON
whenever global binary GB1 is ON.
AHU #1 provides the cooling for the offices for the occupants
listed on Tenant Override Screens 1, 2, and 3. When the cooling
is overridden from a tenant listed on screen #1, GC1 will go ON,
causing GB1 to ON, which in turn causes AHU #1 to go on. When
the cooling category is requested from a tenant listed on screen 2,
GC2 goes ON, which will also cause AHU #1 to go ON.
overridden time
The amount of override time remaining will be displayed here in
an hour and minute format. When the override is not active, this
portion of the screen will be blank.
Example of Binary Global Screen - Combinatorial Mode
BINARY
Global #:
Description: Linux Global
Mode: 1 Combinatorial
Value is ON
_10
name is
On Message #:
Off Message #:
1
2
GB 10
On
Off
when ANY of the following conditions are met.
GC1 is
GC2 is
ON
ON
default
default
false
false
In Local set this global defaults to Off.
----------------------ALARM----------------------Set Condition: None
Type: 0
Message: 0
HOME for menu
3-192
WCC III Technical Guide
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
General Message Screen
GENERAL MESSAGE SCREEN
General Message
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
Test of the data in the fields of this screen. There should be enough spaces for
this to work.
You cannot use QUOTE MARKS on this page. All other characters work.
AaBaCcDdEeFfGgHhIiJjKkLlMmNnOoPpQqRrSsTtUuVvWwXxYyZz1!2@3#4$5%6^7&8*
9(0)-+=~`,<.>/?\|]}{[:;’
HOME for menu
The General Message Screen is used to provide important
information to all users of the WCC III system. Any level user can
write a message in the General Message Screen.
To access this screen, select <General Message> from the Main
Menu.
General Message
Start typing in the blinking field below the General Message
title. You can type up to 20 lines of text. Each line can contain
69 characters. Once you have filled up a line of text or wish to
go to the next line, press <Enter>. To erase characters, use the
<Backspace> key. To erase a whole line of text, press <Ctrl>
<Home> while the cursor is on that line.
WCC III Technical Guide
General Message on Main Screen
As long as there is a message in the General Message Screen, there
will be a “Message!” Icon located at the lower left of the Main
WCCIII Screen to alert users of the message. They must go to the
General Message Screen to read the actual message.
To delete a message, you must press <Ctrl><Home> at the Home
position on the screen or while at any single message line you wish
to delete. A Level 3 password is required to delete messages.
3-193
WCC3.EXE SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS
3-194
WCC III Technical Guide